(CFLAGS-tst-align.c): Add -mpreferred-stack-boundary=4.

1 files changed, 2668 insertions, 2981 deletions

diff --git a/manual/texinfo.tex b/manual/texinfo.tex
index c93912a055..e9293f3b9d 100644
--- a/manual/texinfo.tex
+++ b/manual/texinfo.tex
@@ -3,11 +3,10 @@
 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
 %
-\def\texinfoversion{2004-11-25.16}
+\def\texinfoversion{2003-05-04.08}
 %
 % Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
-% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software
-% Foundation, Inc.
+% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 %
 % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
@@ -24,16 +23,21 @@
 % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
 % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
 %
-% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
-% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
-% restriction.  (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
+% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
+% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
+% what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
 %
 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
 % reports; you can get the latest version from:
-%   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
+%   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/texinfo.tex
+%     (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
 %   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
-%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
-% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
+%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),
+%   and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
+%
+% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
+%
+% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
 %
 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
@@ -55,9 +59,6 @@
 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
 % extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
 % full Texinfo distribution.
-%
-% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
-
 
 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
 
@@ -84,16 +85,12 @@
 \let\ptexend=\end
 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
 \let\ptexexclam=\!
-\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
 \let\ptexgtr=>
 \let\ptexhat=^
 \let\ptexi=\i
 \let\ptexindent=\indent
-\let\ptexinsert=\insert
 \let\ptexlbrace=\{
 \let\ptexless=<
-\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
-\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
 \let\ptexplus=+
 \let\ptexrbrace=\}
 \let\ptexslash=\/
@@ -104,15 +101,6 @@
 % starts a new line in the output.
 \newlinechar = `^^J
 
-% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
-% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
-%
-\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
-  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
-\else
-  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
-\fi
-
 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
@@ -151,81 +139,43 @@
 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
 
 % In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is
 % in some cases the escape char.
 \chardef\colonChar = `\:
 \chardef\commaChar = `\,
 \chardef\dotChar   = `\.
+\chardef\equalChar = `\=
 \chardef\exclamChar= `\!
 \chardef\questChar = `\?
 \chardef\semiChar  = `\;
-\chardef\underChar = `\_
-
 \chardef\spaceChar = `\ %
-\chardef\spacecat = 10
-\def\spaceisspace{\catcode\spaceChar=\spacecat}
+\chardef\underChar = `\_
 
 % Ignore a token.
 %
 \def\gobble#1{}
 
-% The following is used inside several \edef's.
-\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+% True if #1 is the empty string, i.e., called like `\ifempty{}'.
+%
+\def\ifempty#1{\ifemptyx #1\emptymarkA\emptymarkB}%
+\def\ifemptyx#1#2\emptymarkB{\ifx #1\emptymarkA}%
 
 % Hyphenation fixes.
-\hyphenation{
-  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
-  ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
-  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
-  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
-  par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
-  spell-ing spell-ings
-  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
-  wide-spread wrap-around
-}
+\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
+\hyphenation{eshell}
+\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
+\hyphenation{time-stamp}
+\hyphenation{white-space}
 
 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
 \newdimen\bindingoffset
 \newdimen\normaloffset
 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
 
-% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
-% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
-% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
-%
-\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
-
-% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
-% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
-% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
-% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
-% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
-%
-\def\|{%
-  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
-  \leavevmode
-  %
-  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
-  \vadjust{%
-    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
-    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
-    \vskip-\baselineskip
-    %
-    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
-    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
-    \llap{%
-      %
-      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
-      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
-      %
-      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
-      \hskip 12pt
-    }%
-  }%
-}
-
 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
 % and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
@@ -250,7 +200,7 @@
     \tracingassigns1
   \fi
   \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
-  \errorcontextlines16
+  \errorcontextlines\maxdimen
 }%
 
 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
@@ -308,7 +258,7 @@
                    % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
     \shipout\vbox{%
       % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
-      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
+      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
       %
       \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
         \hsize = \outerhsize
@@ -389,162 +339,132 @@
 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
 %
-\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
-\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
-  \def\next{#2}%
+\def\parsearg#1{%
+  \let\next = #1%
   \begingroup
     \obeylines
-    \spaceisspace
-    #1%
-    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
+    \futurelet\temp\parseargx
+}
+
+% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
+% the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
+\def\parseargx{%
+  % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
+  \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
+    \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
+  \else
+    \expandafter\parseargline
+  \fi
 }
 
+% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
+{\obeyspaces %
+ \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
+
 {\obeylines %
   \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
     \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
-    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
+    %
+    % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
+    % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
+    \argremovec #1\c\relax %
+    \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
+    %
+    % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
+    \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
   }%
 }
 
-% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
-\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
-\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
+% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
+% do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
+% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
+% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
 
-% Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
-%
-% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
+% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
 %    @end itemize  @c foo
-% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
-% by \finishparsearg.
-%
-\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
-\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
-\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
-  \def\temp{#3}%
-  \ifx\temp\empty
-    % We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run;
-    % thus we reuse \temp.
-    \let\temp\finishparsearg
-  \else
-    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
-  \fi
-  % Put the space token in:
-  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
+% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
+% `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
+% result to \toks0.
+%
+% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
+% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
+% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
+% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
+% here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
+% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
+% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
+%
+\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \ignoreactivespaces
+    \edef\temp{#1}%
+    \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
+  \endgroup
 }
 
-% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
-% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
-% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
-% just before passing the control to \next.
-% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
-% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
-% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
+% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
 %
-% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
-%
-\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}}
-
-% \parseargdef\foo{...}
-%	is roughly equivalent to
-% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
-% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
-%
-% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
-% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
-
-\def\parseargdef#1{%
-  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
-}
-\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
-  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
-  \def#1##1%
-}
-
-% Several utility definitions with active space:
-{
+\begingroup
   \obeyspaces
-  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
-
-  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
-  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
-  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
-  % should produce a line of output anyway.
-  %
-  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
-
-  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
-  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
-  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
-  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
-}
+  \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
+\endgroup
 
 
 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
 
-% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
-%
-%   \envdef\foo{...}
-%   \def\Efoo{...}
-%
-% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
-% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
-% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
-% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
-% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
-%
-% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
-% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group.  (The
-% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
-% special case.)
+%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
+%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
+\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
+\def\ENVcheck{%
+\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
+\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
 
+% @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
 
-% At runtime, environments start with this:
-\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
-% initialize
-\let\thisenv\empty
+\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
 
-% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
-\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
-\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+\def\beginxxx #1{%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
+{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
+\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
 
-% Check whether we're in the right environment:
-\def\checkenv#1{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \ifx\thisenv\temp
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+%
+\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
+\def\endxxx #1{%
+  \removeactivespaces{#1}%
+  \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
+  %
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
+      % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
+      \errhelp = \EMsimple
+      \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
+    \else
+      \unmatchedenderror\endthing
+    \fi
   \else
-    \badenverr
+    % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
+    \csname E\endthing\endcsname
   \fi
 }
 
-% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected:
-\def\badenverr{%
+% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
+%
+\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
   \errhelp = \EMsimple
-  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
-    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
-}
-\def\inenvironment#1{%
-  \ifx#1\empty
-    out of any environment%
-  \else
-    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
-  \fi
+  \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
 }
 
-% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
-% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
+% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
 %
-\parseargdef\end{%
-  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
-  \else
-    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
-    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
-    \csname E#1\endcsname
-    \endgroup
-  \fi
+\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
+  \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
 }
 
-\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
-
 
 %% Simple single-character @ commands
 
@@ -576,9 +496,6 @@
   !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
 !endgroup
 
-% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
-\let\comma = ,
-
 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
 \let\, = \c
@@ -588,12 +505,10 @@
 \let\ubaraccent = \b
 \let\udotaccent = \d
 
-% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
 \def\questiondown{?`}
 \def\exclamdown{!`}
-\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
-\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
 
 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
 \def\imacro{i}
@@ -606,25 +521,6 @@
   \fi\fi
 }
 
-% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
-% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
-%
-\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
-
-% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
-% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
-% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
-% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
-% \scriptscriptstyle).
-%
-\def\LaTeX{%
-  L\kern-.36em
-  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
-   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
-  \kern-.15em
-  \TeX
-}
-
 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
@@ -678,14 +574,59 @@
 \newbox\groupbox
 \def\vfilllimit{0.7}
 %
-\envdef\group{%
-  \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
+\def\group{\begingroup
+  \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
     \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
     \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
   \fi
-  \startsavinginserts
+  %
+  % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
+  % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
+  % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
+  % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+  % above.  But it's pretty close.
+  \def\Egroup{%
+    \egroup           % End the \vtop.
+    % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
+    \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
+    % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
+    \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
+    % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
+    % group, force a page break.
+    \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
+      \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
+        \page
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \copy\groupbox
+    \endgroup         % End the \group.
+  }%
   %
   \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
+    % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
+    % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
+    % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
+    % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
+    % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
+    % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
+    \everypar = {\strut}%
+    %
+    % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
+    % normal interline spacing.
+    \offinterlineskip
+    %
+    % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
+    % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
+    % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
+    % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
+    % empty paragraph.
+    \ifx\par\lisppar
+      \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
+      %
+      % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
+      \obeylines
+    \fi
+    %
     % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
     % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
     % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
@@ -695,32 +636,6 @@
     \comment
 }
 %
-% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
-% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
-% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
-% above.  But it's pretty close.
-\def\Egroup{%
-    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
-    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
-    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
-    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
-  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
-  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
-  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
-  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
-  \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
-  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
-  % group, force a page break.
-  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
-    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
-      \page
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \box\groupbox
-  \prevdepth = \dimen1
-  \checkinserts
-}
-%
 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
 %
@@ -733,8 +648,10 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 \newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
 
+\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
+
 % Old definition--didn't work.
-%\parseargdef\need{\par %
+%\def\needx #1{\par %
 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
 %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
 %{\baselineskip=0pt%
@@ -742,7 +659,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %\prevdepth=-1000pt
 %}}
 
-\parseargdef\need{%
+\def\needx#1{%
   % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
   % paragraph.
   \par
@@ -781,10 +698,35 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \fi
 }
 
-% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
+% @br   forces paragraph break
 
 \let\br = \par
 
+% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
+% font as three actual period characters.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 1.5em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+    .\hss.\hss.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+  }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 2em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+    .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+  }%
+  \spacefactor=3000
+}
+
 % @page forces the start of a new page.
 %
 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
@@ -797,11 +739,13 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newskip\exdentamount
 
 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
-\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
+\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
+\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
 
 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
-\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
-  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
+\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
 
 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
 % paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
@@ -853,19 +797,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 }
 
 % @include file    insert text of that file as input.
-%
-\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
-\def\includezzz#1{%
-  \pushthisfilestack
-  \def\thisfile{#1}%
-  {%
-    \makevalueexpandable
-    \def\temp{\input #1 }%
-    \expandafter
-  }\temp
-  \popthisfilestack
-}
-\def\filenamecatcodes{%
+% Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
+\def\include{\begingroup
   \catcode`\\=\other
   \catcode`~=\other
   \catcode`^=\other
@@ -874,50 +807,33 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \catcode`<=\other
   \catcode`>=\other
   \catcode`+=\other
-  \catcode`-=\other
-}
-
-\def\pushthisfilestack{%
-  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
-}
-\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
-  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
-}
-\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
-  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
-}
-
-\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
-\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
-  the stack of filenames is empty.}}
+  \parsearg\includezzz}
+% Restore active chars for included file.
+\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
+  % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
+  \def\thisfile{#1}%
+  \let\value=\expandablevalue
+  \input\thisfile
+\endgroup}
 
 \def\thisfile{}
 
 % @center line
 % outputs that line, centered.
 %
-\parseargdef\center{%
-  \ifhmode
-    \let\next\centerH
-  \else
-    \let\next\centerV
-  \fi
-  \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
-}
-\def\centerH#1{%
-  {%
-    \hfil\break
-    \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
-    \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
-    \line{#1}%
-    \break
-  }%
-}
-\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
+\def\center{\parsearg\docenter}
+\def\docenter#1{{%
+  \ifhmode \hfil\break \fi
+  \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+  \line{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
+  \ifhmode \break \fi
+}}
 
 % @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
 
-\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
+\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
 
 % @comment ...line which is ignored...
 % @c is the same as @comment
@@ -938,7 +854,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
 \def\noneword{none}
 %
-\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
+\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
+\def\doparagraphindent#1{%
   \def\temp{#1}%
   \ifx\temp\asisword
   \else
@@ -955,7 +872,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
-\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
+\def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
+\def\doexampleindent#1{%
   \def\temp{#1}%
   \ifx\temp\asisword
   \else
@@ -969,18 +887,21 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 % @firstparagraphindent WORD
 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
-% after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
+% after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indentat such
 % paragraphs.
 %
 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
-% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
-% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
-% By default, we suppress indentation.
+% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.  We
+% switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.  By
+% default, we suppress indentation.
 %
 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\newdimen\currentparindent
+%
 \def\insertword{insert}
 %
-\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
+\def\firstparagraphindent{\parsearg\dofirstparagraphindent}
+\def\dofirstparagraphindent#1{%
   \def\temp{#1}%
   \ifx\temp\noneword
     \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
@@ -1000,24 +921,15 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %
 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
   \gdef\indent{%
-    \restorefirstparagraphindent
-    \indent
-  }%
-  \gdef\noindent{%
-    \restorefirstparagraphindent
-    \noindent
+    \global\let\indent=\ptexindent
+    \global\everypar = {}%
   }%
   \global\everypar = {%
-    \kern -\parindent
-    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+    \kern-\parindent
+    \global\let\indent=\ptexindent
+    \global\everypar = {}%
   }%
-}
-
-\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
-  \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
-  \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
-  \global \everypar = {}%
-}
+}%
 
 
 % @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
@@ -1025,18 +937,23 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\asis#1{#1}
 
 % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
+% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
+% to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
+% superscripts, special math chars, etc.
+%
+\let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
 %
 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
-% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
-% which is what @var uses.
-{
-  \catcode\underChar = \active
-  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
-    \catcode\underChar=\active
-    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
-  }
-}
+% _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing
+% if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.
+%
+{\catcode\underChar = \active
+\gdef\mathunderscore{%
+  \catcode\underChar=\active
+  \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
+}}
+%
 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
 % this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
@@ -1047,16 +964,15 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %
 \def\math{%
   \tex
-  \mathunderscore
+  \mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore
   \let\\ = \mathbackslash
   \mathactive
-  $\finishmath
-}
-\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
+  \implicitmath\finishmath}
+\def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex}
 
 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
-% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
-% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
+% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an
+% argument to a command which set the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
 %
 {
   \catcode`^ = \active
@@ -1072,33 +988,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 }
 
 % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
-\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
-\def\minus{$-$}
-
-% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
-% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
-% font as three actual period characters.
-%
-\def\dots{%
-  \leavevmode
-  \hbox to 1.5em{%
-    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil
-    .\hfil.\hfil.%
-    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil
-  }%
-}
-
-% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
-%
-\def\enddots{%
-  \dots
-  \spacefactor=3000
-}
-
-% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
-% Texinfo's parsing.
-%
-\let\comma = ,
+\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
+\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
 
 % @refill is a no-op.
 \let\refill=\relax
@@ -1114,20 +1005,20 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
 \def\setfilename{%
-   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
    \iflinks
-     \tryauxfile
-     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
-     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+     \readauxfile
    \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
    \openindices
-   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
+   \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
    %
    % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
    % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
+   % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
    \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
-   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
-   \closein 1
+   \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
+   \closein1
+   \temp
    %
    \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
 }
@@ -1163,23 +1054,17 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newif\ifpdf
 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
 
-% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
-% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
-% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
 \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
+  \pdffalse
+  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
+  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
+  \let\endlink = \relax
+  \let\linkcolor = \relax
+  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
 \else
-  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
-  \else
-    \ifcase\pdfoutput
-    \else
-      \pdftrue
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-%
-\ifpdf
+  \pdftrue
+  \pdfoutput = 1
   \input pdfcolor
-  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
   \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
     \def\imagewidth{#2}%
     \def\imageheight{#3}%
@@ -1200,13 +1085,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
       \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
     \fi}
-  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
-    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code in a section title
-    % aren't expanded.
-    \atdummies
-    \normalturnoffactive
-    \pdfdest name{#1} xyz%
-  }}
+  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}}
   \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
   \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?
   \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
@@ -1215,94 +1094,48 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
     \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
   \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
-    \advance\tempnum by 1
+    \advance\tempnum by1
     \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
-  %
-  % #1 is the section text.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
-  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node
-  % text, which might be empty if this toc entry had no
-  % corresponding node.  #4 is the page number.
-  %
-  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
-    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
-    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
-    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
-    % seem worthwhile, since most documents are normally structured.
-    \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
-    \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}\fi
-    %
-    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{#1}%
-  }
-  %
-  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
-    \begingroup
+  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
+    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+    \ifeof 1\else\begingroup
+      \closein 1
       % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
       \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
       \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
       %
-      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
-      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
-	\def\thischapnum{##2}%
-	\def\thissecnum{0}%
-	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
-      }%
-      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
-	\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
-	\def\thissecnum{##2}%
-	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
-      }%
-      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
-	\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
-	\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
-      }%
-      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
-	\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
-      }%
-      \def\thischapnum{0}%
-      \def\thissecnum{0}%
-      \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
-      %
-      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
-      % al. a second time, below.
-      \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
-      \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
-      \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
-      \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
-      \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
-      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
-      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
-      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+      \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
+      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
+      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
+      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
+      \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
+      \let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry
+      \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
+      \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
+      \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
       \input \jobname.toc
+      \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
+      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
+      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
+      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
+        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
+      \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
+      \let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry
+      \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
+      \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
+      \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
       %
-      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
-      % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
-      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
-      %
-      % We use the node names as the destinations.
-      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
-        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
-      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
-        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
-      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
-        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
-      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
-        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
+      % Make special characters normal for writing to the pdf file.
       %
-      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
-      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
-      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
-      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
-      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
-      %
-      % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
-      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Right
-      % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
       \indexnofonts
+      \let\tt=\relax
       \turnoffactive
       \input \jobname.toc
-    \endgroup
-  }
-  %
+    \endgroup\fi
+  }}
   \def\makelinks #1,{%
     \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
     \ifx\params\E
@@ -1333,6 +1166,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
   \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
   \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
+  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
   \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
     \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
     \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
@@ -1350,17 +1184,18 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \def\pdfurl#1{%
     \begingroup
       \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
-      \makevalueexpandable
+      \let\value=\expandablevalue
       \leavevmode\Red
       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
         user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
+        % #1
     \endgroup}
   \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
   \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
   \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
   \def\maketoks{%
-    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
+    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
     \ifx\first0\adn0
     \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
     \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
@@ -1380,44 +1215,20 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
     \linkcolor #1\endlink}
   \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
-\else
-  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
-  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
-  \let\endlink = \relax
-  \let\linkcolor = \relax
-  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
-\fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
+\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
 
 
 \message{fonts,}
-
-% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
-% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
-% italics, not bold italics.
-%
-\def\setfontstyle#1{%
-  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
-  \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
-}
-
-% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
-%
-\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
-
-\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
-\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
-\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
-\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
-\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
+% Font-change commands.
 
 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
-% So we set up a \sf.
+% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
 \newfam\sffam
-\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
 
-% We don't need math for this font style.
-\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
+% We don't need math for this one.
+\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
 
 % Default leading.
 \newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
@@ -1468,11 +1279,21 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\scshape{csc}
 \def\scbshape{csc}
 
-% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
-\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
-\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
-\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\newcount\mainmagstep
+\ifx\bigger\relax
+  % not really supported.
+  \mainmagstep=\magstep1
+  \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+  \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
+\else
+  \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
+  \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+  \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\fi
+% Instead of cmb10, you may want to use cmbx10.
+% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
+% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10
+% (in Bob's opinion).
 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
@@ -1482,14 +1303,12 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
 
-% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
-\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}
+% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
+\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
-\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}
-\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
 
 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
-\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
@@ -1502,7 +1321,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \font\smallsy=cmsy9
 
 % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
-\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
@@ -1514,8 +1332,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \font\smalleri=cmmi8
 \font\smallersy=cmsy8
 
-% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
-\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
+% Fonts for title page:
 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
@@ -1530,7 +1347,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\authortt{\sectt}
 
 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
-\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
@@ -1543,7 +1359,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
 
 % Section fonts (14.4pt).
-\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
@@ -1556,7 +1371,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
 
 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
-\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
@@ -1564,22 +1378,11 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
-\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
-
-% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
-\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
-\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}
-\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}
-\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}
-\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}
-\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}
-\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}
-\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}
-\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}
-\font\reducedi=cmmi10
-\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
+% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
+% but that is not a standard magnification.
 
 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
@@ -1594,81 +1397,50 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 }
 
 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
-% of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
-% current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
-% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
-%
-% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
-% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
-% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
-%
-% This all needs generalizing, badly.
-%
+% of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
+% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
+% cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
+% \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
+% redefine \bf itself.
 \def\textfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
   \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
-  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
-  \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{text}%
-  \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
 \def\titlefonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
   \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
   \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
   \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
-  \def\curfontsize{title}%
-  \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
 \def\chapfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
   \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
-  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
-  \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{chap}%
-  \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
+  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
 \def\secfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
   \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
-  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
-  \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{sec}%
-  \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
+  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
 \def\subsecfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
   \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
-  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
-  \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
-  \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
+  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
-\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
-\def\reducedfonts{%
-  \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
-  \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
-  \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
-  \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
-  \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
-  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
 \def\smallfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
   \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
   \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
   \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{small}%
-  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
 \def\smallerfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
   \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
   \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
   \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
-  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
 
 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
@@ -1677,7 +1449,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
 % can fit this many characters:
 %   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
-% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
+% If we use \smallerfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
 %   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
 % the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
@@ -1685,13 +1457,14 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
 %   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
 %
-% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
+% I wish we used A4 paper on this side of the Atlantic.
+%
 % --karl, 24jan03.
 
 
 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
 %
-\textfonts \rm
+\textfonts
 
 % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
 \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
@@ -1702,7 +1475,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 % Fonts for short table of contents.
 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
-\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}  % no cmb12
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
 
@@ -1716,27 +1489,15 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
 \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
 
-% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
-% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
-\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-
-% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
-% ttsl for book titles, do we?
-\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-
 \let\i=\smartitalic
-\let\slanted=\smartslanted
 \let\var=\smartslanted
 \let\dfn=\smartslanted
 \let\emph=\smartitalic
+\let\cite=\smartslanted
 
-% @b, explicit bold.
 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
 \let\strong=\b
 
-% @sansserif, explicit sans.
-\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
-
 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
 % the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
@@ -1759,6 +1520,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
   \null
 }
+\let\ttfont=\t
 \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
 \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
 \font\keysy=cmsy9
@@ -1799,7 +1561,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \null
 }
 
-% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
 
@@ -1817,6 +1579,10 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
     \codex
   }
+  %
+  % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
+  % just treat them as a normal -.
+  \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
 }
 
 \def\realdash{-}
@@ -1840,7 +1606,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
 %   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
 %   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
-\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
+\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
+\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
   \def\arg{#1}%
   \ifx\arg\worddistinct
     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
@@ -1866,8 +1633,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
 
-% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
-\let\indicateurl=\code
+% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+\let\url=\code
 \let\env=\code
 \let\command=\code
 
@@ -1899,10 +1666,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \endlink
 \endgroup}
 
-% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
-%
-\let\url=\uref
-
 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
 %
@@ -1944,101 +1707,22 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
 
-% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
-% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
-% all-uppercase.
-% 
-\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
-\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
-  {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
-  \def\temp{#2}%
-  \ifx\temp\empty \else
-    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
-  \fi
-}
-
-% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
-% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
-% 
-\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
-\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
-  {\frenchspacing #1}%
-  \def\temp{#2}%
-  \ifx\temp\empty \else
-    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
-  \fi
-}
+% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
+\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
 
-% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
-%
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
 \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
 
-% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
-% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
-% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
-% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
-% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
-% 
-% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
-% that.  The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
-% font height.
-% 
-% feymr - regular
-% feymo - slanted
-% feybr - bold
-% feybo - bold slanted
-% 
-% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
-% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
-% Hmm.
-% 
-% Also doesn't work in math.  Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
-% Hope not.
-% 
-% 
-\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
-\def\eurofont{%
-  % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
-  % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
-  % installations which never need the symbold don't have to have the
-  % font installed.
-  % 
-  % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
-  % that to the current nominal size.
-  % 
-  % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
-  % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
-  % 
-  \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
-  %
-  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 
-    % bold:
-    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
-  \else 
-    % regular:
-    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
-  \fi
-  \thiseurofont
-}
-
-% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
-% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
+% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  For now, only works in text size;
+% we'd have to redo the font mechanism to change the \scriptstyle and
+% \scriptscriptstyle font sizes to make it look right in headings.
 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
 %
 \def\registeredsymbol{%
-  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
-               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
+  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm R$}\hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
     }$%
 }
 
-% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
-%  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
-% so we'll define it if necessary.
-% 
-\ifx\Orb\undefined
-\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
-\fi
-
 
 \message{page headings,}
 
@@ -2057,103 +1741,87 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
  \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
 
-\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
+\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
         \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
 
-\envdef\titlepage{%
-  % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
-  \begingroup
-    \parindent=0pt \textfonts
-    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
-    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
-    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
-    \finishedtitlepagetrue
-    %
-    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
-    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
-    \let\oldpage = \page
-    \def\page{%
+\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+   \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+   \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
+   %
+   \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
+                   \let\tt=\authortt}%
+   %
+   % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+   \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+   %
+   % Now you can print the title using @title.
+   \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
+   \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
+                    % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+                    \finishedtitlepagefalse
+                    \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
+   % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+   %
+   % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
+   \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
+   \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % @author should come last, but may come many times.
+   \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
+   \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
+      {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+   % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+   \let\oldpage = \page
+   \def\page{%
       \iffinishedtitlepage\else
-	 \finishtitlepage
+         \finishtitlepage
       \fi
+      \oldpage
       \let\page = \oldpage
-      \page
-      \null
-    }%
+      \hbox{}}%
+%   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
 }
 
 \def\Etitlepage{%
-    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
-	\finishtitlepage
-    \fi
-    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
-    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
-    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
-    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
-    \oldpage
-  \endgroup
-  %
-  % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
-  % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
-  \HEADINGSon
-  %
-  % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
-  \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
-    \shortcontents
-    \contents
-    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
-    \global\let\contents = \relax
-  \fi
-  %
-  \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
-    \contents
-    \global\let\contents = \relax
-    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
-  \fi
+   \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+      \finishtitlepage
+   \fi
+   % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+   % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+   % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+   % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+   \oldpage
+   \endgroup
+   %
+   % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
+   % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
+   \HEADINGSon
+   %
+   % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+   \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+     \shortcontents
+     \contents
+     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+     \global\let\contents = \relax
+   \fi
+   %
+   \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+     \contents
+     \global\let\contents = \relax
+     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+   \fi
 }
 
 \def\finishtitlepage{%
-  \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
-  \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
-  \finishedtitlepagetrue
-}
-
-%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
-
-\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
-\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
-
-\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
-		\let\tt=\authortt}
-
-\parseargdef\title{%
-  \checkenv\titlepage
-  \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1}
-  % print a rule at the page bottom also.
-  \finishedtitlepagefalse
-  \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
-}
-
-\parseargdef\subtitle{%
-  \checkenv\titlepage
-  {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
-}
-
-% @author should come last, but may come many times.
-% It can also be used inside @quotation.
-%
-\parseargdef\author{%
-  \def\temp{\quotation}%
-  \ifx\thisenv\temp
-    \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
-  \else
-    \checkenv\titlepage
-    \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
-    {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}%
-  \fi
+   \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+   \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
 }
 
-
 %%% Set up page headings and footings.
 
 \let\thispage=\folio
@@ -2163,7 +1831,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
 \newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
 
-% Now make TeX use those variables
+% Now make Tex use those variables
 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
                             \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
@@ -2177,27 +1845,32 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % @evenfooting @thisfile||
 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
 
-
 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
-\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
-\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
+
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 %
+
+\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 
-\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
-\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
-\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 
-\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
 
-\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
-\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
-\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 
-\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
-\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
-\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
   \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
   %
   % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
@@ -2206,8 +1879,9 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
 }
 
-\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
-
+\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+%
+}% unbind the catcode of @.
 
 % @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
 % @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
@@ -2221,7 +1895,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
 
-\def\HEADINGSoff{%
+\def\HEADINGSoff{
 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
 \HEADINGSoff
@@ -2230,7 +1904,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
 % edge of all pages.
-\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{
 \global\pageno=1
 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
@@ -2242,7 +1916,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
 % page number on top right.
-\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{
 \global\pageno=1
 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
@@ -2289,11 +1963,12 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
 % It generates no output of its own.
 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
-\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
+\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
 
 
 \message{tables,}
-% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
 
 % default indentation of table text
 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
@@ -2305,7 +1980,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
 \newdimen\itemmax
 
-% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
 % these defs.
 % They also define \itemindex
 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
@@ -2317,10 +1992,22 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
 
+\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+
+\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
   \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
   \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
-  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
   \itemindex{#1}%
   \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
   %
@@ -2344,13 +2031,17 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
     \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
     %
-    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  However, if
-    % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
-    % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
-    % cause the example and the item to crash together.  So we use this
-    % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
-    % \parskip glue after all.  Section titles are handled this way also.
-    % 
+    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  (Unfortunately
+    % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
+    % \baselineskip glue.)  However, if what follows is an environment
+    % such as @example, there will be no \parskip glue; then
+    % the negative vskip we just would cause the example and the item to
+    % crash together.  So we use this bizarre value of 10001 as a signal
+    % to \aboveenvbreak to insert \parskip glue after all.
+    % (Possibly there are other commands that could be followed by
+    % @example which need the same treatment, but not section titles; or
+    % maybe section titles are the only special case and they should be
+    % penalty 10001...)
     \penalty 10001
     \endgroup
     \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
@@ -2370,72 +2061,81 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \fi
 }
 
-\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
-\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
+\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
+\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
+\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
+\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
+
+% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
+\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
 
 % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
-\envdef\table{%
-  \let\itemindex\gobble
-  \tablecheck{table}%
-}
-\envdef\ftable{%
-  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
-  \tablecheck{ftable}%
-}
-\envdef\vtable{%
-  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
-  \tablecheck{vtable}%
+\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
+
+\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\dontindex #1{}
+\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
+\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
+
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
+\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
+
+\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\begingroup %
+\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
+\let\itemindex=#1%
+\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
+\def\itemfont{#2}%
+\itemmax=\tableindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
+\exdentamount=\tableindent
+\parindent = 0pt
+\parskip = \smallskipamount
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\item = \internalBitem %
+\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
+\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
+\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
+\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
+\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
 }
-\def\tablecheck#1{%
-  \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
-    \endgroup
-    \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
-      that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
-    \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
-  \else
-    \let\next\tablex
-  \fi
-  \next
-}
-\def\tablex#1{%
-  \def\itemindicate{#1}%
-  \parsearg\tabley
-}
-\def\tabley#1{%
-  {%
-    \makevalueexpandable
-    \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
-    \expandafter
-  }\temp \endtablez
-}
-\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
-  \aboveenvbreak
-  \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
-  \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
-  \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
-  \itemmax=\tableindent
-  \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
-  \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
-  \exdentamount=\tableindent
-  \parindent = 0pt
-  \parskip = \smallskipamount
-  \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
-  \let\item = \internalBitem
-  \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
-}
-\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
-\let\Eftable\Etable
-\let\Evtable\Etable
-\let\Eitemize\Etable
-\let\Eenumerate\Etable
 
 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
 
 \newcount \itemno
 
-\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
+\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
+
+\def\itemizezzz #1{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
+  \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
+}
 
-\def\doitemize#1{%
+\def\itemizey#1#2{%
   \aboveenvbreak
   \itemmax=\itemindent
   \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
@@ -2444,33 +2144,13 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \parindent=0pt
   \parskip=\smallskipamount
   \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+  \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
   \def\itemcontents{#1}%
   % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
   \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
   \let\item=\itemizeitem
 }
 
-% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
-%
-\def\itemizeitem{%
-  \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
-  {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
-  {%
-   % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
-   % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
-   % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
-   % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
-   % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
-   % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
-   % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
-   % that's the theory.
-   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
-   \noindent
-   \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
-   \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
-  \flushcr
-}
-
 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
 %
@@ -2480,8 +2160,11 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
 % argument is the same as `1'.
 %
-\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
+\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
+\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
+  %
   % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
   \def\thearg{#1}%
   \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
@@ -2552,13 +2235,13 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   }%
 }
 
-% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
 % common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
 %
 \def\startenumeration#1{%
   \advance\itemno by -1
-  \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
+  \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
 }
 
 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
@@ -2569,6 +2252,16 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
 
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
+
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+\advance\itemno by 1
+{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
+\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
+{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
+\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
+\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
+\flushcr}
 
 % @multitable macros
 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
@@ -2595,14 +2288,24 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
 %   @item ...
 %   using the widest term desired in each column.
+%
+% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
+% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
+% will parse correctly, i.e.,
+%
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
+%      template}
+% Not:
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
+%      {Column 3 template}
 
 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
 
-% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
-% if they are.
+% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
+% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
 
 % Sample multitable:
 
@@ -2646,12 +2349,13 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
 \newif\ifsetpercent
 
-% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
-% be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
-%
-\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
+% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
+% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
+% just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
+% percent of \hsize for this column.
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
   \global\advance\colcount by 1
-  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
   \setuptable
 }
 
@@ -2684,33 +2388,18 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \go
 }
 
-% multitable-only commands.
-%
-% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
-% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
-% of an alignment entry.  Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
-\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
-%
-% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
-% line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
-% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
-%					--karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
-\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
-
 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
 %
-\newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
-%
-\envdef\multitable{%
+\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
+\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
   \vskip\parskip
-  \startsavinginserts
-  %
-  % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
-  % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
-  % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
-  % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
-  \def\item{\crcr}%
-  %
+  \let\item=\crcrwithfootnotes
+  % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
+  % line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just & until
+  % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.  --karl,
+  % nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
+  \let\tab=&%
+  \let\startfootins=\startsavedfootnote
   \tolerance=9500
   \hbadness=9500
   \setmultitablespacing
@@ -2718,93 +2407,85 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \parindent=\multitableparindent
   \overfullrule=0pt
   \global\colcount=0
-  %
-  \everycr = {%
-    \noalign{%
-      \global\everytab={}%
-      \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
-      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
-      \checkinserts
-      % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
-      %\filbreak
-	% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
-	% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
-	% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
-    }%
+  \def\Emultitable{%
+    \global\setpercentfalse
+    \crcrwithfootnotes\crcr
+    \egroup\egroup
   }%
   %
-  \parsearg\domultitable
-}
-\def\domultitable#1{%
   % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
   \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
   %
+  % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
+  % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
+  % The table preamble
+  % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
+  \everycr{\noalign{%
+  %
+  % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+  % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
+  % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
+  % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+    \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
+  %
   % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
   % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
   % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
   % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
-  \halign\bgroup &%
-    \global\advance\colcount by 1
-    \multistrut
-    \vtop{%
-      % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
-      \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
-      %
-      % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
-      % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
-      % the first one.
-      %
-      % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
-      % to the width of each template entry.
-      %
-      % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
-      % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
-      % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
-      % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
-      %
-      % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
-      \rightskip=0pt
-      \ifnum\colcount=1
-	% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
-	\advance\hsize by\leftskip
-      \else
-	\ifsetpercent \else
-	  % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
-	  % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
-	  \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
-	\fi
-       % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
-      \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
-      \fi
-      % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
-      % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
-      % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
-      % For example:
-      % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
-      % @item @code{#}
-      % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
-      % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
-      % marking characters.
-      \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
-    }\cr
-}
-\def\Emultitable{%
-  \crcr
-  \egroup % end the \halign
-  \global\setpercentfalse
-}
-
-\def\setmultitablespacing{%
-  \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
-  %
-  % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
-  % \multitableparskip calculation.  We used define \multistrut based on
-  % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
-  % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
+  \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
+    \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+  %
+  % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+  % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+  % the first one.
+  %
+  % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+  % to the width of each template entry.
+  %
+  % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+  % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+  % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
+  % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+  %
+  % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+  \rightskip=0pt
+  \ifnum\colcount=1
+    % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+    \advance\hsize by\leftskip
+  \else
+    \ifsetpercent \else
+      % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+      % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+      \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+    \fi
+   % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+  \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+  \fi
+  % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+  % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+  % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+  % For example:
+  % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+  % @item @code{#}
+  % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+  % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
+  % characters.
+  \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
+% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
+% current baselineskip.
 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
-\fi
+%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
+%% to keep lines equally spaced
+\let\multistrut = \strut
+\else
+%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
+\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
+width0pt\relax} \fi
 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
 %% table. If not, do nothing.
 %%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
@@ -2819,33 +2500,163 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
                                       %% than skip between lines in the table.
 \fi}
 
+% In case a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
+% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is
+% finished.  Otherwise, the insertion is lost, it never migrates to the
+% main vertical list.  --kasal, 22jan03.
+%
+\newbox\savedfootnotes
+%
+% \dotable \let's \startfootins to this, so that \dofootnote will call
+% it instead of starting the insertion right away.
+\def\startsavedfootnote{%
+  \global\setbox\savedfootnotes = \vbox\bgroup
+    \unvbox\savedfootnotes
+}
+\def\crcrwithfootnotes{%
+  \crcr
+  \ifvoid\savedfootnotes \else
+    \noalign{\insert\footins{\box\savedfootnotes}}%
+  \fi
+}
 
 \message{conditionals,}
-
-% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
-% @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
-% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
-% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
-% attempt to close an environment group.
-%
-\def\makecond#1{%
-  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
-  \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
+% Prevent errors for section commands.
+% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
+\def\ignoresections{%
+  \let\chapter=\relax
+  \let\unnumbered=\relax
+  \let\top=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
+  \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
+  \let\section=\relax
+  \let\subsec=\relax
+  \let\subsubsec=\relax
+  \let\subsection=\relax
+  \let\subsubsection=\relax
+  \let\appendix=\relax
+  \let\appendixsec=\relax
+  \let\appendixsection=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
+  \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
+  \let\contents=\relax
+  \let\smallbook=\relax
+  \let\titlepage=\relax
+}
+
+% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
+% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
+% incorrectly.
+%
+% We use \empty instead of \relax for the @def... commands, so that \end
+% doesn't throw an error.  For instance:
+% @ignore
+% @deffn ...
+% @end deffn
+% @end ignore
+%
+% The @end deffn is going to get expanded, because we're trying to allow
+% nested conditionals.  But we don't want to expand the actual @deffn,
+% since it might be syntactically correct and intended to be ignored.
+% Since \end checks for \relax, using \empty does not cause an error.
+%
+\def\ignoremorecommands{%
+  \let\defcodeindex = \relax
+  \let\defcv = \empty
+  \let\defcvx = \empty
+  \let\Edefcv = \empty
+  \let\deffn = \empty
+  \let\deffnx = \empty
+  \let\Edeffn = \empty
+  \let\defindex = \relax
+  \let\defivar = \empty
+  \let\defivarx = \empty
+  \let\Edefivar = \empty
+  \let\defmac = \empty
+  \let\defmacx = \empty
+  \let\Edefmac = \empty
+  \let\defmethod = \empty
+  \let\defmethodx = \empty
+  \let\Edefmethod = \empty
+  \let\defop = \empty
+  \let\defopx = \empty
+  \let\Edefop = \empty
+  \let\defopt = \empty
+  \let\defoptx = \empty
+  \let\Edefopt = \empty
+  \let\defspec = \empty
+  \let\defspecx = \empty
+  \let\Edefspec = \empty
+  \let\deftp = \empty
+  \let\deftpx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftp = \empty
+  \let\deftypefn = \empty
+  \let\deftypefnx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypefn = \empty
+  \let\deftypefun = \empty
+  \let\deftypefunx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypefun = \empty
+  \let\deftypeivar = \empty
+  \let\deftypeivarx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypeivar = \empty
+  \let\deftypemethod = \empty
+  \let\deftypemethodx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypemethod = \empty
+  \let\deftypeop = \empty
+  \let\deftypeopx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypeop = \empty
+  \let\deftypevar = \empty
+  \let\deftypevarx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypevar = \empty
+  \let\deftypevr = \empty
+  \let\deftypevrx = \empty
+  \let\Edeftypevr = \empty
+  \let\defun = \empty
+  \let\defunx = \empty
+  \let\Edefun = \empty
+  \let\defvar = \empty
+  \let\defvarx = \empty
+  \let\Edefvar = \empty
+  \let\defvr = \empty
+  \let\defvrx = \empty
+  \let\Edefvr = \empty
+  \let\clear = \relax
+  \let\down = \relax
+  \let\evenfooting = \relax
+  \let\evenheading = \relax
+  \let\everyfooting = \relax
+  \let\everyheading = \relax
+  \let\headings = \relax
+  \let\include = \relax
+  \let\item = \relax
+  \let\lowersections = \relax
+  \let\oddfooting = \relax
+  \let\oddheading = \relax
+  \let\printindex = \relax
+  \let\pxref = \relax
+  \let\raisesections = \relax
+  \let\ref = \relax
+  \let\set = \relax
+  \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
+  \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
+  \let\settitle = \relax
+  \let\up = \relax
+  \let\verbatiminclude = \relax
+  \let\xref = \relax
 }
-\makecond{iftex}
-\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
-\makecond{ifnothtml}
-\makecond{ifnotinfo}
-\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
-\makecond{ifnotxml}
 
 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
 %
 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+\def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
-\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
 \def\html{\doignore{html}}
-\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
@@ -2855,133 +2666,198 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
 \def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
 
-% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
-%
-% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
-\newcount\doignorecount
+% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory = \comment
 
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
+%
 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
-  % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
-  \catcode`\@ = \other
-  \catcode`\{ = \other
-  \catcode`\} = \other
+  % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+  \ignoresections
+  %
+  % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
+  % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
+  % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match.
+  \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
   %
   % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
-  \spaceisspace
+  \catcode\spaceChar = 10
   %
-  % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
-  \doignorecount = 0
+  % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
+  \catcode`\{ = 9
+  \catcode`\} = 9
   %
-  % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
-  \dodoignore{#1}%
-}
-
-{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
-  \obeylines %
+  % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
+  \catcode`\@ = 12
   %
-  \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
-    % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
-    %
-    % Define a command to find the next `@end #1', which must be on a line
-    % by itself.
-    \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
-    % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
-    % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
-    % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
-    \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
-    %
-    % And now expand that command.
-    \obeylines %
-    \doignoretext ^^M%
-  }%
-}
-
-\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \ifx\temp\empty			% Nothing found.
-    \let\next\doignoretextzzz
-  \else					% Found a nested condition, ...
-    \advance\doignorecount by 1
-    \let\next\doignoretextyyy		% ..., look for another.
-    % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
+  \def\ignoreword{#1}%
+  \ifx\ignoreword\documentdescriptionword
+    % The c kludge breaks documentdescription, since
+    % `documentdescription' contains a `c'.  Means not everything will
+    % be ignored inside @documentdescription, but oh well...
+  \else
+    % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
+    % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
+    %   @c @end ifinfo
+    % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
+    % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
+    \catcode`\c = 14
   \fi
-  \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
+  %
+  % And now expand the command defined above.
+  \doignoretext
+}
+
+% What we do to finish off ignored text.
+%
+\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+
+\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
+\def\obstexwarn{%
+  \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
+  % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
+  % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
+    \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
+    \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
+    \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/non-gnu/TeX.README.)}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
+    \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
+    \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+    \fi
 }
 
-% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
+% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
+% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
+% uncomment the following line:
+%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
+
+% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
+% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
 %
-\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
-  \ifnum\doignorecount = 0	% We have just found the outermost @end.
-    \let\next\enddoignore
-  \else				% Still inside a nested condition.
-    \advance\doignorecount by -1
-    \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
-  \fi
-  \next
+\def\nestedignore#1{%
+  \obstexwarn
+  % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
+  % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
+  % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
+  % the chance of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
+  % page 401 of the TeXbook.
+  %
+  \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
+    % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+    \ignoresections
+    %
+    % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
+    % @end command again.
+    \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
+    %
+    % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
+    % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
+    % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
+    % undefine them.
+    %
+    % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
+    % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
+    \ignoremorecommands
+    %
+    % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
+    % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
+    % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because some sites
+    % might not have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
+    % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
+    % stuff compared to the main input.
+    %
+    \nullfont
+    \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
+    \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
+    \let\tensf=\nullfont
+    % Similarly for index fonts.
+    \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
+    \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
+    \let\smallsf=\nullfont
+    % Similarly for smallexample fonts.
+    \let\smallerrm=\nullfont \let\smallerit=\nullfont \let\smallersl=\nullfont
+    \let\smallerbf=\nullfont \let\smallertt=\nullfont \let\smallersc=\nullfont
+    \let\smallersf=\nullfont
+    %
+    % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
+    \tracinglostchars = 0
+    %
+    % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
+    \frenchspacing
+    %
+    % Don't report underfull hboxes.
+    \hbadness = 10000
+    %
+    % Do minimal line-breaking.
+    \pretolerance = 10000
+    %
+    % Do not execute instructions in @tex.
+    \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
+    % Do not execute macro definitions.
+    % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
+    \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
 }
 
-% Finish off ignored text.
-\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
-
-
 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
 %
 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
-% didn't need it.
-% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
+% didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
+% losing inside @example, for instance.
 %
-\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
+  \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
+  \parsearg\setxxx}
+\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
-  {%
-    \makevalueexpandable
-    \def\temp{#2}%
-    \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
-    \ifx\temp\empty
-      \next{}%
-    \else
-      \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
-    \fi
-  }%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
+  \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+  \fi
+  \endgroup
 }
-% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
-\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
+% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
+% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
+% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
+\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
 
 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
 %
-\parseargdef\clear{%
-  {%
-    \makevalueexpandable
-    \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
-  }%
-}
+\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
+\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
 
 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
-\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
-\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
 {
-  \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
+  \catcode`\_ = \active
   %
-  \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
-    \let\value = \expandablevalue
-    % We don't want these characters active, ...
+  % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
+  % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
+  % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
+  \gdef\value{\begingroup
     \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
-    % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
-    % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
-    % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
-    \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
-  }
+    \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
+    \valuexxx}
 }
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
 
 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
-% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
-% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
-% the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
-% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
-% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
-% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
+% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
+% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
+% about that.  The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable
+% is set), since the result winds up in the index file.  This means that
+% if the variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost
+% certain it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with
+% sufficient work to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of
+% complete).
 %
 \def\expandablevalue#1{%
   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
@@ -2995,36 +2871,55 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
 % with @set.
 %
-% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
-%
-\makecond{ifset}
-\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
-\def\doifset#1#2{%
-  {%
-    \makevalueexpandable
-    \let\next=\empty
-    \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
-      #1% If not set, redefine \next.
-    \fi
-    \expandafter
-  }\next
+\def\ifset{\parsearg\doifset}
+\def\doifset#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \let\next=\ifsetfail
+  \else
+    \let\next=\ifsetsucceed
+  \fi
+  \next
 }
-\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
+\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
+\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
 
 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
 %
-% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
-% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
-% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg\doifclear}
+\def\doifclear#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \let\next=\ifclearsucceed
+  \else
+    \let\next=\ifclearfail
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
+
+% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we
+% read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make
+% `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
 %
-\makecond{ifclear}
-\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
-\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
+\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
+\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
+\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
+\def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
+\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}
 
-% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
-% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
-\let\dircategory=\comment
+% True conditional.  Since \set globally defines its variables, we can
+% just start and end a group (to keep the @end definition undefined at
+% the outer level).
+%
+\def\conditionalsucceed#1{\begingroup
+  \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\endgroup}%
+}
 
 % @defininfoenclose.
 \let\definfoenclose=\comment
@@ -3034,8 +2929,9 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % Index generation facilities
 
 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
-% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
-\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
 
 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
@@ -3148,7 +3044,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \def\definedummyletter##1{%
     \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}%
   }%
-  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
   %
   % Do the redefinitions.
   \commondummies
@@ -3171,7 +3066,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \def\definedummyletter##1{%
     \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}%
   }%
-  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
   %
   % Do the redefinitions.
   \commondummies
@@ -3184,11 +3078,26 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   %
   \normalturnoffactive
   %
-  \commondummiesnofonts
-  %
+  % Control letters and accents.
   \definedummyletter{_}%
-  %
-  % Non-English letters.
+  \definedummyletter{,}%
+  \definedummyletter{"}%
+  \definedummyletter{`}%
+  \definedummyletter{'}%
+  \definedummyletter{^}%
+  \definedummyletter{~}%
+  \definedummyletter{=}%
+  \definedummyword{u}%
+  \definedummyword{v}%
+  \definedummyword{H}%
+  \definedummyword{dotaccent}%
+  \definedummyword{ringaccent}%
+  \definedummyword{tieaccent}%
+  \definedummyword{ubaraccent}%
+  \definedummyword{udotaccent}%
+  \definedummyword{dotless}%
+  %
+  % Other non-English letters.
   \definedummyword{AA}%
   \definedummyword{AE}%
   \definedummyword{L}%
@@ -3200,10 +3109,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \definedummyword{oe}%
   \definedummyword{o}%
   \definedummyword{ss}%
-  \definedummyword{exclamdown}%
-  \definedummyword{questiondown}%
-  \definedummyword{ordf}%
-  \definedummyword{ordm}%
   %
   % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
   \definedummyword{bf}%
@@ -3215,19 +3120,41 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \definedummyword{tclose}%
   \definedummyword{tt}%
   %
-  \definedummyword{LaTeX}%
+  % Texinfo font commands.
+  \definedummyword{b}%
+  \definedummyword{i}%
+  \definedummyword{r}%
+  \definedummyword{sc}%
+  \definedummyword{t}%
+  %
   \definedummyword{TeX}%
+  \definedummyword{acronym}%
+  \definedummyword{cite}%
+  \definedummyword{code}%
+  \definedummyword{command}%
+  \definedummyword{dfn}%
+  \definedummyword{dots}%
+  \definedummyword{emph}%
+  \definedummyword{env}%
+  \definedummyword{file}%
+  \definedummyword{kbd}%
+  \definedummyword{key}%
+  \definedummyword{math}%
+  \definedummyword{option}%
+  \definedummyword{samp}%
+  \definedummyword{strong}%
+  \definedummyword{uref}%
+  \definedummyword{url}%
+  \definedummyword{var}%
+  \definedummyword{w}%
   %
   % Assorted special characters.
   \definedummyword{bullet}%
-  \definedummyword{comma}%
   \definedummyword{copyright}%
-  \definedummyword{registeredsymbol}%
   \definedummyword{dots}%
   \definedummyword{enddots}%
   \definedummyword{equiv}%
   \definedummyword{error}%
-  \definedummyword{euro}%
   \definedummyword{expansion}%
   \definedummyword{minus}%
   \definedummyword{pounds}%
@@ -3235,9 +3162,10 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \definedummyword{print}%
   \definedummyword{result}%
   %
-  % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
+  % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
+  % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
   % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
-  \makevalueexpandable
+  \let\value = \expandablevalue
   %
   % Normal spaces, not active ones.
   \unsepspaces
@@ -3246,97 +3174,45 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \turnoffmacros
 }
 
-% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
-%
-% Better have this without active chars.
-{
-  \catcode`\~=\other
-  \gdef\commondummiesnofonts{%
-    % Control letters and accents.
-    \definedummyletter{!}%
-    \definedummyaccent{"}%
-    \definedummyaccent{'}%
-    \definedummyletter{*}%
-    \definedummyaccent{,}%
-    \definedummyletter{.}%
-    \definedummyletter{/}%
-    \definedummyletter{:}%
-    \definedummyaccent{=}%
-    \definedummyletter{?}%
-    \definedummyaccent{^}%
-    \definedummyaccent{`}%
-    \definedummyaccent{~}%
-    \definedummyword{u}%
-    \definedummyword{v}%
-    \definedummyword{H}%
-    \definedummyword{dotaccent}%
-    \definedummyword{ringaccent}%
-    \definedummyword{tieaccent}%
-    \definedummyword{ubaraccent}%
-    \definedummyword{udotaccent}%
-    \definedummyword{dotless}%
-    %
-    % Texinfo font commands.
-    \definedummyword{b}%
-    \definedummyword{i}%
-    \definedummyword{r}%
-    \definedummyword{sc}%
-    \definedummyword{t}%
-    %
-    % Commands that take arguments.
-    \definedummyword{acronym}%
-    \definedummyword{cite}%
-    \definedummyword{code}%
-    \definedummyword{command}%
-    \definedummyword{dfn}%
-    \definedummyword{emph}%
-    \definedummyword{env}%
-    \definedummyword{file}%
-    \definedummyword{kbd}%
-    \definedummyword{key}%
-    \definedummyword{math}%
-    \definedummyword{option}%
-    \definedummyword{samp}%
-    \definedummyword{strong}%
-    \definedummyword{tie}%
-    \definedummyword{uref}%
-    \definedummyword{url}%
-    \definedummyword{var}%
-    \definedummyword{verb}%
-    \definedummyword{w}%
-  }
-}
+% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+{\obeyspaces
+ \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
+
 
 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
 % by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
 % would be for a given command (usually its argument).
 %
+\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
+\def\indexdummydots{...}
+%
 \def\indexnofonts{%
-  % Accent commands should become @asis.
-  \def\definedummyaccent##1{%
-    \expandafter\let\csname ##1\endcsname\asis
-  }%
-  % We can just ignore other control letters.
-  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
-    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{}%
-  }%
-  % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
-  \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
-  %
-  \commondummiesnofonts
-  %
-  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
-  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
-  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
-  %\let\tt=\asis
-  %
   \def\ { }%
   \def\@{@}%
   % how to handle braces?
   \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
   %
-  % Non-English letters.
+  \let\,=\asis
+  \let\"=\asis
+  \let\`=\asis
+  \let\'=\asis
+  \let\^=\asis
+  \let\~=\asis
+  \let\==\asis
+  \let\u=\asis
+  \let\v=\asis
+  \let\H=\asis
+  \let\dotaccent=\asis
+  \let\ringaccent=\asis
+  \let\tieaccent=\asis
+  \let\ubaraccent=\asis
+  \let\udotaccent=\asis
+  \let\dotless=\asis
+  %
+  % Other non-English letters.
   \def\AA{AA}%
   \def\AE{AE}%
   \def\L{L}%
@@ -3350,170 +3226,130 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \def\ss{ss}%
   \def\exclamdown{!}%
   \def\questiondown{?}%
-  \def\ordf{a}%
-  \def\ordm{o}%
   %
-  \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
-  \def\TeX{TeX}%
+  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
+  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
+  %\let\tt=\asis
   %
-  % Assorted special characters.
-  % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
-  \def\bullet{bullet}%
-  \def\comma{,}%
-  \def\copyright{copyright}%
-  \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
-  \def\dots{...}%
-  \def\enddots{...}%
-  \def\equiv{==}%
-  \def\error{error}%
-  \def\euro{euro}%
-  \def\expansion{==>}%
-  \def\minus{-}%
-  \def\pounds{pounds}%
-  \def\point{.}%
-  \def\print{-|}%
-  \def\result{=>}%
-  %
-  % Don't write macro names.
-  \emptyusermacros
+  % Texinfo font commands.
+  \let\b=\asis
+  \let\i=\asis
+  \let\r=\asis
+  \let\sc=\asis
+  \let\t=\asis
+  %
+  \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
+  \let\acronym=\asis
+  \let\cite=\asis
+  \let\code=\asis
+  \let\command=\asis
+  \let\dfn=\asis
+  \let\dots=\indexdummydots
+  \let\emph=\asis
+  \let\env=\asis
+  \let\file=\asis
+  \let\kbd=\asis
+  \let\key=\asis
+  \let\math=\asis
+  \let\option=\asis
+  \let\samp=\asis
+  \let\strong=\asis
+  \let\uref=\asis
+  \let\url=\asis
+  \let\var=\asis
+  \let\w=\asis
 }
 
 \let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
 
+% For \ifx comparisons.
+\def\emptymacro{\empty}
+
 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
-% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
-\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
+%
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
 
 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
-% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
-% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
+% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
+% is with defuns, which call us directly.
 %
 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
-  \iflinks
-  {%
-    % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
-    \toks0 = {#2}%
-    % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
-    \def\thirdarg{#3}%
-    \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
-      \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
-    \fi
-    %
-    \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
-    %
-    \ifvmode
-      \dosubindsanitize
-    \else
-      \dosubindwrite
-    \fi
-  }%
-  \fi
-}
-
-% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
-%
-\def\dosubindwrite{%
   % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
   \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
-    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
+    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
   \fi
-  %
-  % Remember, we are within a group.
-  \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
-  \escapechar=`\\
-  \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
-      % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
-  %
-  % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
-  % get the string to sort by.
-  {\indexnofonts
-   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
-   \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
-  }%
-  %
-  % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
-  % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
-  % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
-  % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
-  % sorted result.
-  \edef\temp{%
-    \write\writeto{%
-      \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+  {%
+    \count255=\lastpenalty
+    {%
+      \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+      \escapechar=`\\
+      {%
+        \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
+        \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+        % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+        %
+        % The main index entry text.
+        \toks0 = {#2}%
+        %
+        % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
+        \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
+           % If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
+           % line to write.
+          \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
+        \fi
+        %
+        % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
+        % get the string to sort by.
+        {\indexnofonts
+         \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
+         \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
+        }%
+        %
+        % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
+        % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
+        % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
+        % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
+        % sorted result.
+        \edef\temp{%
+          \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
+            \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+        }%
+        %
+        % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+        % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+        % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+        % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
+        % like this:
+        % @end defun
+        % @tindex whatever
+        % @defun ...
+        % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+        % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+        % the previous defun.
+        %
+        % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
+        % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+        %
+        % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+        %
+        \iflinks
+          \ifvmode
+            \skip0 = \lastskip
+            \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\skip0 \fi
+          \fi
+          %
+          \temp % do the write
+          %
+          \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
+        \fi
+      }%
+    }%
+    \penalty\count255
   }%
-  \temp
-}
-
-% Take care of unwanted page breaks:
-%
-% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
-% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
-% the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
-% \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
-% like this:
-% @end defun
-% @tindex whatever
-% @defun ...
-% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
-% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
-% the previous defun.
-%
-% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
-% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
-%
-% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
-%
-% But wait, there is a catch there:
-% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
-% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
-% of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
-% representation of the skip.
-%
-% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
-% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
-%
-\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
-%
-% ..., ready, GO:
-%
-\def\dosubindsanitize{%
-  % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
-  \skip0 = \lastskip
-  \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
-  \count255 = \lastpenalty
-  %
-  % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
-  % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
-  % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a
-  % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
-  % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
-  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
-  \else
-    \vskip-\skip0
-  \fi
-  %
-  \dosubindwrite
-  %
-  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
-    % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
-    % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.  In that case, we want
-    % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
-    % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
-    % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
-    % 
-    %   @deffn deffn-whatever
-    %   @vindex index-whatever
-    %   Description.
-    % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
-    % and the "Description." paragraph.
-    \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi
-  \else
-    % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
-    % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
-    % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
-    \nobreak\vskip\skip0
-  \fi
 }
 
 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
@@ -3551,12 +3387,14 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
 %
-\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
+\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
+\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
   \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
   %
   \smallfonts \rm
   \tolerance = 9500
   \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
+  \indexbreaks
   %
   % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
   % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
@@ -3583,7 +3421,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
       % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
       % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
       % to make right now.
-      \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
+      \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
       \catcode`\\ = 0
       \escapechar = `\\
       \begindoublecolumns
@@ -3605,10 +3443,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \removelastskip
   %
   % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
-  \nobreak
-  \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
-  \penalty 0
-  \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
+  \penalty -300
   %
   % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
   % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
@@ -3618,100 +3453,80 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
   \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
   \leftline{\secbf #1}%
+  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
+  %
   % Do our best not to break after the initial.
   \nobreak
-  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
 }}
 
-% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
-% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
-% and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
+% flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
+% entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
 %
-% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
-%	\def\entry#1#2{...
-% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
-% @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
-% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
-%
-% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
-%                                 --kasal, 21nov03
-\def\entry{%
-  \begingroup
-    %
-    % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
-    % affect previous text.
-    \par
-    %
-    % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
-    \parfillskip = 0in
-    %
-    % No extra space above this paragraph.
-    \parskip = 0in
-    %
-    % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
-    \finalhyphendemerits = 0
-    %
-    % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
-    % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
-    % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
-    % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
-    % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
-    %
-    % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
-    % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
-    \hangindent = 2em
-    %
-    % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
-    % with blank space.
-    \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
-    %
-    % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
-    % columns.
-    \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
+  %
+  % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+  % affect previous text.
+  \par
+  %
+  % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+  \parfillskip = 0in
+  %
+  % No extra space above this paragraph.
+  \parskip = 0in
+  %
+  % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+  \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+  %
+  % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+  % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
+  % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
+  % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+  % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
+  %
+  % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+  % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+  \hangindent = 2em
+  %
+  % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+  % with blank space.
+  \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+  %
+  % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
+  \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+  %
+  % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
+  % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
+  \noindent
+  %
+  % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
+  #1%
+  % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+  % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
+  % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+  \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
+  \def\tempb{#2}%
+  \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
+  \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
+  \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
     %
-    % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
-    \afterassignment\doentry
-    \let\temp =
-}
-\def\doentry{%
-    \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
-      \noindent
-      \aftergroup\finishentry
-      % And now comes the text of the entry.
-}
-\def\finishentry#1{%
-    % #1 is the page number.
+    % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+    % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+    % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+    \hfil\penalty50
+    \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
     %
-    % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
-    % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
-    % cursed by a Unix daemon.
-    \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
-    \def\tempb{#1}%
-    \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
-    \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
-    \ifx\tempc\tempd
-      \ %
+    % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+    % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
+    % \hbox ensues.
+    \ifpdf
+      \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
     \else
-      %
-      % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
-      % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
-      % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
-      \hfil\penalty50
-      \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
-      %
-      % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
-      % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
-      % \hbox ensues.
-      \ifpdf
-	\pdfgettoks#1.%
-	\ \the\toksA
-      \else
-	\ #1%
-      \fi
+      \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
     \fi
-    \par
-  \endgroup
-}
+  \fi%
+  \par
+\endgroup}
 
 % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
@@ -3880,12 +3695,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \message{sectioning,}
 % Chapters, sections, etc.
 
-% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course.  But we count the unnumbered
-% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
-% outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
-% numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
-% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
-\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
 \newcount\chapno
 \newcount\secno        \secno=0
 \newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
@@ -3893,12 +3702,9 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
 \newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
-%
 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
-% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
-% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
+% We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
-%
 \def\appendixletter{%
   \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
@@ -3936,12 +3742,11 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
 % page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
-% However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks.
 \def\thischapter{}
 \def\thissection{}
 
 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
-\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
 
 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
@@ -3951,142 +3756,121 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
 
-% we only have subsub.
-\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
-%
-% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
-% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
-\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
-%
-% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
-% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
-\def\chapheadtype{N}
-
-% Choose a heading macro
-% #1 is heading type
-% #2 is heading level
-% #3 is text for heading
-\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
-  % Compute the abs. sec. level:
-  \absseclevel=#2
-  \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
-  % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
-  \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
-    \absseclevel = 0
+% Choose a numbered-heading macro
+% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
+% #2 is text for heading
+\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \chapterzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \seczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \chapterzzz{#2}
   \else
-    \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
-      \absseclevel = 3
-    \fi
+    \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
   \fi
-  % The heading type:
-  \def\headtype{#1}%
-  \if \headtype U%
-    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
-      \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
-    \fi
+\fi
+\suppressfirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
+\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \appendixzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \appendixzzz{#2}
   \else
-    % Check for appendix sections:
-    \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
-      \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
-    \else
-      \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
-	\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
-      \fi\fi
-    \fi
-    % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
-    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
-      \def\headtype{U}%
-    \else
-      \chardef\unmlevel = 3
-    \fi
+    \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
   \fi
-  % Now print the heading:
-  \if \headtype U%
-    \ifcase\absseclevel
-	\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
-    \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
-    \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
-    \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
-    \fi
+\fi
+\suppressfirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
+\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \unnumberedzzz{#2}
   \else
-    \if \headtype A%
-      \ifcase\absseclevel
-	  \appendixzzz{#3}%
-      \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
-      \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
-      \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
-      \fi
-    \else
-      \ifcase\absseclevel
-	  \chapterzzz{#3}%
-      \or \seczzz{#3}%
-      \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
-      \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
-      \fi
-    \fi
+    \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
   \fi
-  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
-}
-
-% an interface:
-\def\numhead{\genhead N}
-\def\apphead{\genhead A}
-\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
-
-% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
-% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
-%
-% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
-% (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
-\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
-%
-\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
-\def\chapterzzz#1{%
-  % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
-  % as an @include file.
-  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
-    \global\advance\chapno by 1
-  %
-  % Used for \float.
-  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
-  \resetallfloatnos
-  %
-  \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
-  %
-  % Write the actual heading.
-  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
-  %
-  % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
+\fi
+\suppressfirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
+\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
+\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
+\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz #1{%
+  \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+  \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
+  \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+  \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+  % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
+  % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
+  \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+  \writetocentry{chap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}}
+  \donoderef
   \global\let\section = \numberedsec
   \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
   \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
 }
 
-\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
-\def\appendixzzz#1{%
-  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
-    \global\advance\appendixno by 1
-  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
-  \resetallfloatnos
-  %
-  \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
-  \message{\appendixnum}%
-  %
-  \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
-  %
+% we use \chapno to avoid indenting back
+\def\appendixbox#1{%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} \the\chapno}%
+  \hbox to \wd0{#1\hss}}
+
+\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
+\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz #1{%
+  \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+  \global\advance \appendixno by 1
+  \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
+  \chapmacro {#1}{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}%
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+  \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+  \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+  \writetocentry{appendix}{#1}{{\appendixletter}}
+  \appendixnoderef
   \global\let\section = \appendixsec
   \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
   \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
 }
 
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
-\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
-  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
-    \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
-  %
-  % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
-  \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
-  \resetallfloatnos
+% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
+\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
+\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
+
+% @top is like @unnumbered.
+\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+
+\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
+  \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
   %
   % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
   % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
@@ -4099,98 +3883,134 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
   % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
   % the toc entries.)
-  \toks0 = {#1}%
-  \message{(\the\toks0)}%
-  %
-  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
+  \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
   %
+  \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
+  \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+  \writetocentry{unnumbchap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}}
+  \unnumbnoderef
   \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
   \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
   \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
 }
 
-% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
-\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
-  % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
-  % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
-  % Thus we are safer this way:		--kasal, 24feb04
-  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
-  \unnmhead0{#1}%
-  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
-}
-
-% @top is like @unnumbered.
-\let\top\unnumbered
-
 % Sections.
-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
-\def\seczzz#1{%
-  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
+\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
+\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz #1{%
+  \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
+  \writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}
+  \donoderef
+  \nobreak
 }
 
-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
-\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
-  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
+\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
+  \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
+  \writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}
+  \appendixnoderef
+  \nobreak
 }
-\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
 
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
-\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
-  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
+\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
+  \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+  \writetocentry{unnumbsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}
+  \unnumbnoderef
+  \nobreak
 }
 
 % Subsections.
-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
-  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+  \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+  \writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
+  \donoderef
+  \nobreak
 }
 
-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
-  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
-                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+  \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+  \writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
+  \appendixnoderef
+  \nobreak
 }
 
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
-  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
-                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
+  \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+  \writetocentry{unnumbsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
+  \unnumbnoderef
+  \nobreak
 }
 
 % Subsubsections.
-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
-  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
-                 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+  \subsubsecheading {#1}
+    {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+  \writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
+  \donoderef
+  \nobreak
 }
 
-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
-  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
-                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
+  \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+  \subsubsecheading {#1}
+    {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+  \writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
+  \appendixnoderef
+  \nobreak
 }
 
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
-  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
-                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+  \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+  \writetocentry{unnumbsubsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
+  \unnumbnoderef
+  \nobreak
 }
 
+% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
+% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
+\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
+\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
+\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
+
 % These macros control what the section commands do, according
 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
-\let\section = \numberedsec
-\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
-\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
 
 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
 
@@ -4203,27 +4023,23 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
 
 
-\def\majorheading{%
+\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
+\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
   {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
-  \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
-}
+  {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                    \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                    \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
 
-\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
-\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
+\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
   {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
                     \parindent=0pt\raggedright
-                    \rm #1\hfill}}%
-  \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
-  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
-}
+                    \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
 
 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
-\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
-  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
-\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
-  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
-\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
-  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
+\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
+\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
 
 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
@@ -4232,6 +4048,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
 
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+
 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
 
@@ -4254,7 +4072,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
 
-\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{
 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
@@ -4262,193 +4080,116 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 \CHAPPAGon
 
-% Chapter opening.
-%
-% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
-% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
-%
-% To test against our argument.
-\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
-\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
-\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
-%
-\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
+\def\CHAPFplain{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
+
+% Plain chapter opening.
+% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
+\def\chfplain#1#2{%
   \pchapsepmacro
   {%
     \chapfonts \rm
-    %
-    % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the
-    % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
-    % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
-    \gdef\thissection{#1}%
-    \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
-    %
-    % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
-    % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
-    \def\temptype{#2}%
-    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
-      \def\toctype{unnchap}%
-      \def\thischapter{#1}%
-    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
-      \def\toctype{omit}%
-      \xdef\thischapter{}%
-    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
-      \def\toctype{app}%
-      % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
-      % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.  And we don't
-      % use \thissection because that changes with each section.
-      %
-      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter:
-                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
-    \else
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
-      \def\toctype{numchap}%
-      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno:
-                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
-    \fi\fi\fi
-    %
-    % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the
-    % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
-    % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
-    \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
-    %
-    % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
-    % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
-    % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
-    % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
-    % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
-    \donoderef{#2}%
-    %
-    % Typeset the actual heading.
+    \def\chapnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
-          \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+          \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
           \unhbox0 #1\par}%
   }%
   \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
   \nobreak
 }
 
+% Plain opening for unnumbered.
+\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
+
 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
-\def\centerparameters{%
-  \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
-  \leftskip = \rightskip
-  \parfillskip = 0pt
-}
+\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
+  \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
+    \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+    \leftskip = \rightskip
+    \parfillskip = 0pt
+  }%
+  \chfplain{#1}{}%
+}}
 
+\CHAPFplain % The default
 
-% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
-% updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03.
-%
-\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
-%
 \def\unnchfopen #1{%
 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
                        \parindent=0pt\raggedright
                        \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
 }
+
 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
 \par\penalty 5000 %
 }
+
 \def\centerchfopen #1{%
 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
                        \parindent=0pt
                        \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
 }
-\def\CHAPFopen{%
-  \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
-  \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
 
+\def\CHAPFopen{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
 
-% Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
-% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
-%
+
+% Section titles.
 \newskip\secheadingskip
-\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
+\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
+\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
 
 % Subsection titles.
-\newskip\subsecheadingskip
-\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
+\newskip \subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
+\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
 
 % Subsubsection titles.
-\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
-\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
+\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
+\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
+\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
 
 
-% Print any size, any type, section title.
+% Print any size section title.
 %
-% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
-% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
-% section number.
-%
-\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
+% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
+% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
+  {%
+    \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
+    \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
+  }%
   {%
     % Switch to the right set of fonts.
-    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
-    %
-    % Insert space above the heading.
-    \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
-    %
-    % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
-    \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
-    \def\temptype{#3}%
-    %
-    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
-      \def\toctype{unn}%
-      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
-    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
-      % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
-      % and don't redefine \thissection.
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
-      \def\toctype{omit}%
-      \let\sectionlevel=\empty
-    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
-      \def\toctype{app}%
-      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
-    \else
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
-      \def\toctype{num}%
-      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
-    \fi\fi\fi
+    \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
     %
-    % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chfplain.
-    \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
+    % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
+    \def\secnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
     %
-    % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
-    % Again, see comments in \chfplain.
-    \donoderef{#3}%
-    %
-    % Output the actual section heading.
     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
-          \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
-          \unhbox0 #1}%
+          \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
+          \unhbox0 #3}%
   }%
-  % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
-  % Don't allow stretch, though.
-  \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
-  %
-  % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
-  % was followed by glue.
+  % Add extra space after the heading -- either a line space or a
+  % paragraph space, whichever is more.  (Some people like to set
+  % \parskip to large values for some reason.)  Don't allow stretch, though.
+  \nobreak
+  \ifdim\parskip>\normalbaselineskip
+    \kern\parskip
+  \else
+    \kern\normalbaselineskip
+  \fi
   \nobreak
-  %
-  % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
-  % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
-  % discardable item.)
-  \vskip-\parskip
-  % 
-  % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
-  % 10000.  This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
-  % section headings.  Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
-  % 
-  %   @section sec-whatever
-  %   @deffn def-whatever
-  \penalty 10001
 }
 
 
@@ -4457,152 +4198,119 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newwrite\tocfile
 
 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
-% Called from @chapter, etc.
-%
-% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
-% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
-% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
-% read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
-% destination to jump to.
+% Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
+% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
 %
+% Usage: \writetocentry{chap}{The Name of The Game}{{\the\chapno}}
 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
-% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the
-% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
 %
 \newif\iftocfileopened
-\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
-%
 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
-  \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
-  \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
-    \iftocfileopened\else
-      \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
-      \global\tocfileopenedtrue
-    \fi
-    %
-    \iflinks
-      \toks0 = {#2}%
-      \toks2 = \expandafter{\lastnode}%
-      \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}{#3}%
-                               {\the\toks2}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
-      \temp
-    \fi
+  \iftocfileopened\else
+    \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+    \global\tocfileopenedtrue
   \fi
   %
-  % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
-  % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't
-  % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
-  % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
-  % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named
-  % `1', and two named `2'.
-  \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
+  \iflinks
+    \toks0 = {#2}%
+    \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}#3{\folio}}}%
+    \temp
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which
+  % will be the target of the links in the table of contents.  We can't
+  % just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and
+  % 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages
+  % of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and
+  % two named `2'.
+  \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
 }
 
 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
 \newcount\savepageno
 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
 
-% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
+% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
+% to \tocfile.
 %
 \def\startcontents#1{%
-  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
-  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
-  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
-  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
-  \contentsalignmacro
-  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
-  %
-  % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
-  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
-  \def\thischapter{}%
-  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
-  %
-  \savepageno = \pageno
-  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
-    \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
-    % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
-    % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
-    %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
-    \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
-    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
-    %
-    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
-    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+   % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+   % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
+   % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+   % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+   \contentsalignmacro
+   \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+   %
+   % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+   % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+   \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
+   \savepageno = \pageno
+   \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+      \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
+      % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
+      % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
+      %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
+      \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+      \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+      %
+      % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+      \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
 }
 
 
 % Normal (long) toc.
 \def\contents{%
-  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
-    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
-    \ifeof 1 \else
-      \input \jobname.toc
-    \fi
-    \vfill \eject
-    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
-    \ifeof 1 \else
-      \pdfmakeoutlines
-    \fi
-    \closein 1
-  \endgroup
-  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
-  \global\pageno = \savepageno
+   \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
+     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+     \ifeof 1 \else
+       \closein 1
+       \input \jobname.toc
+     \fi
+     \vfill \eject
+     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+     \pdfmakeoutlines
+   \endgroup
+   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+   \global\pageno = \savepageno
 }
 
 % And just the chapters.
 \def\summarycontents{%
-  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
-    %
-    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
-    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
-    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
-    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
-    \secfonts
-    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
-    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
-    \rm
-    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
-    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
-    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
-    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
-    \ifeof 1 \else
-      \input \jobname.toc
-    \fi
-    \closein 1
-    \vfill \eject
-    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
-  \endgroup
-  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
-  \global\pageno = \savepageno
+   \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
+      %
+      \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
+      \let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry
+      \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
+      % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+      \secfonts
+      \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
+      \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
+      \rm
+      \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+      \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
+      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
+      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
+      \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
+      \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
+      \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
+      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+      \ifeof 1 \else
+        \closein 1
+        \input \jobname.toc
+      \fi
+     \vfill \eject
+     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+   \endgroup
+   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+   \global\pageno = \savepageno
 }
 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
 
-% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
-% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
-%
-\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
-  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
-  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
-  % But use \hss just in case.
-  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
-  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
-  %
-  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
-  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
-  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
-  % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
-  % there are before deciding ...
-  \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
-}
+\ifpdf
+  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
+\fi
 
 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
 % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
@@ -4610,46 +4318,58 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
 
 % Chapters, in the main contents.
-\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
 %
 % Chapters, in the short toc.
 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
-\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
-  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
+  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
 }
 
 % Appendices, in the main contents.
-% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
+\def\appendixentry#1#2#3{%
+  \dochapentry{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} #2}\labelspace#1}{#3}}
 %
-\def\appendixbox#1{%
-  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
-  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
-  \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
+% Appendices, in the short toc.
+\let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
+% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
+% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
 %
-\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\newdimen\shortappendixwidth
+%
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
+  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+  % But use \hss just in case.
+  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+  \dimen0 = 1em
+  \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}%
+}
 
 % Unnumbered chapters.
-\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
-\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
+\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#1}{#3}}
+\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2#3{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}}
 
 % Sections.
-\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
-\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
+\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
 
 % Subsections.
-\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
-\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
+\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#5}}
 
 % And subsubsections.
-\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
-\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+  \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
+\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#6}}
 
 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
-% Same as \defaultparindent.
-\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
 
 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
 % page number.
@@ -4680,8 +4400,17 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
 \endgroup}
 
-% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
-\let\tocentry = \entry
+% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
+% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
+% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
+% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
+\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
+  % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
+  % typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
+  % have to do the usual translation tricks.
+  \entry{#1}{#2}%
+\endgroup}
 
 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
@@ -4691,8 +4420,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
-\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
-\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
 
 
 \message{environments,}
@@ -4719,10 +4448,10 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
 %
-\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
    \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
    \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
-   \vbox{%
+   \vbox{
       \hrule height\dimen2
       \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
          \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
@@ -4736,13 +4465,14 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
 
-\envdef\tex{%
+\def\tex{\begingroup
   \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
   \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
   \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
   \catcode `\%=14
   \catcode `\+=\other
   \catcode `\"=\other
+  \catcode `\==\other
   \catcode `\|=\other
   \catcode `\<=\other
   \catcode `\>=\other
@@ -4758,7 +4488,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \let\!=\ptexexclam
   \let\i=\ptexi
   \let\indent=\ptexindent
-  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
   \let\{=\ptexlbrace
   \let\+=\tabalign
   \let\}=\ptexrbrace
@@ -4769,11 +4498,10 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
   \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
   \def\@{@}%
-}
-% There is no need to define \Etex.
+\let\Etex=\endgroup}
 
 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
-% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
+% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
 
 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
@@ -4784,6 +4512,19 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % have any width.
 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
 
+% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+% space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+% should produce a line of output anyway.
+%
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
+
+% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
+% for use in \parsearg.
+{\sepspaces%
+\global\let\obeyedspace= }
+
 % This space is always present above and below environments.
 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
 
@@ -4793,8 +4534,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
 %
 \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
-  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
-  % \sectionheading, q.v.
+  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz, q.v.
   \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
     \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
     \endgraf
@@ -4802,7 +4542,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
       \removelastskip
       % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
       % or better ...
-      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
+      \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \else \penalty-50 \fi
       \vskip\envskipamount
     \fi
   \fi
@@ -4834,52 +4574,52 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %
 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
 
-\envdef\cartouche{%
-  \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
-  \startsavinginserts
-  \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
-  \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
-  \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
-  \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
-  \cartouter=\hsize
-  \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt	% allow for 3pt kerns on either
-				% side, and for 6pt waste from
-				% each corner char, and rule thickness
-  \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
-  % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
-  \let\nonarrowing=\comment
-  \vbox\bgroup
-      \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
-      \carttop
-      \hbox\bgroup
-	  \hskip\lskip
-	  \vrule\kern3pt
-	  \vbox\bgroup
-	      \kern3pt
-	      \hsize=\cartinner
-	      \baselineskip=\normbskip
-	      \lineskip=\normlskip
-	      \parskip=\normpskip
-	      \vskip -\parskip
-	      \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
-}
+\def\cartouche{%
+\par  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
+\begingroup
+        \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+        \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
+        \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+                          \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+        \cartouter=\hsize
+        \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+%                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
+%                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
+        \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+        % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+        \let\nonarrowing=\comment
+        \vbox\bgroup
+                \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+                \carttop
+                \hbox\bgroup
+                        \hskip\lskip
+                        \vrule\kern3pt
+                        \vbox\bgroup
+                                \hsize=\cartinner
+                                \kern3pt
+                                \begingroup
+                                        \baselineskip=\normbskip
+                                        \lineskip=\normlskip
+                                        \parskip=\normpskip
+                                        \vskip -\parskip
 \def\Ecartouche{%
-              \ifhmode\par\fi
-	      \kern3pt
-	  \egroup
-	  \kern3pt\vrule
-	  \hskip\rskip
-      \egroup
-      \cartbot
-  \egroup
-  \checkinserts
-}
+                                \endgroup
+                                \kern3pt
+                        \egroup
+                        \kern3pt\vrule
+                        \hskip\rskip
+                \egroup
+                \cartbot
+        \egroup
+\endgroup
+}}
 
 
 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
 % inside a group.
 \def\nonfillstart{%
   \aboveenvbreak
+  \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
   \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
   \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
   \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
@@ -4892,99 +4632,103 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
     \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
     \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+    \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+    \let\nonarrowing=\relax
   \fi
-  \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
 }
 
-% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
-% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
-% This affects the following displayed environments:
-%    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
+% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
+% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
 %
-\def\smallword{small}
-\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
-\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
-\def\setnormaldispenv{%
-  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
-    \smallexamplefonts \rm
-  \fi
-}
-\def\setsmalldispenv{%
-  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
-  \else
-    \smallexamplefonts \rm
-  \fi
-}
+% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
+% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
+% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
+% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
+% the environment.
+%
+\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
 
-% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
-% Let's do it by one command:
-\def\makedispenv #1#2{
-  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
-  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
-  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
-  \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
+\def\lisp{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
+  \tt
+  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+  \gobble       % eat return
 }
 
-% Define two synonyms:
-\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
-  \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
-  \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
-}
+% @example: Same as @lisp.
+\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
 
-% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
-%
 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
-%
-\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
-  \nonfillstart
-  \tt
-  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
-  \gobble       % eat return
+\def\smalllisp{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \smallexamplefonts
+  \lisp
 }
+\let\smallexample = \smalllisp
 
-% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+
+% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
 %
-\makedispenv {display}{%
+\def\display{\begingroup
   \nonfillstart
+  \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
   \gobble
 }
-
-% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
 %
-\makedispenv{format}{%
-  \let\nonarrowing = t%
-  \nonfillstart
-  \gobble
+% @smalldisplay: @display plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \smallexamplefonts \rm
+  \display
 }
 
-% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
-\envdef\flushleft{%
-  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+%
+\def\format{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
   \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
   \gobble
 }
-\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
+%
+% @smallformat: @format plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smallformat{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \smallexamplefonts \rm
+  \format
+}
+
+% @flushleft (same as @format).
+%
+\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
 
 % @flushright.
 %
-\envdef\flushright{%
-  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+\def\flushright{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
   \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
   \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
   \gobble
 }
-\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
 
 
 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
-% and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
-% we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
-% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
+% and narrows the margins.
 %
-\envdef\quotation{%
+\def\quotation{%
+  \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
   {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
   \parindent=0pt
+  % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+  % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
+  \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
   %
   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
@@ -4993,27 +4737,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
     \let\nonarrowing = \relax
   \fi
-  \parsearg\quotationlabel
-}
-
-% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
-% doing normal filling.
-%
-\def\Equotation{%
-  \par
-  \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
-    % indent a bit.
-    \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
-  \fi
-  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
-}
-
-% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
-\def\quotationlabel#1{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \ifx\temp\empty \else
-    {\bf #1: }%
-  \fi
 }
 
 
@@ -5035,7 +4758,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %
 % [Knuth] p. 380
 \def\uncatcodespecials{%
-  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials}
 %
 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
 % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
@@ -5083,8 +4806,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   }
 \endgroup
 \def\setupverbatim{%
-  \nonfillstart
-  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
   % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
   \tt
   \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
@@ -5106,7 +4827,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %
 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
 \begingroup
-  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
+  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12
   \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
 \endgroup
 %
@@ -5123,6 +4844,13 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
 %
 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
+%% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
+%% \begingroup
+%% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1
+%% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
+%% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
+%% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]
+%% |endgroup
 %
 \begingroup
   \catcode`\ =\active
@@ -5130,32 +4858,54 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
   % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
   % line in the output.
-  \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
-  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
-  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
+  \gdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\end{verbatim}}%
 \endgroup
 %
-\envdef\verbatim{%
-    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
+\def\verbatim{%
+  \def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \begingroup
+    \nonfillstart
+    \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+    \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
 }
-\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
-
 
 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
 %
-\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
+% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
+\def\verbatiminclude{%
+  \begingroup
+    \catcode`\\=\other
+    \catcode`~=\other
+    \catcode`^=\other
+    \catcode`_=\other
+    \catcode`|=\other
+    \catcode`<=\other
+    \catcode`>=\other
+    \catcode`+=\other
+    \parsearg\doverbatiminclude
+}
+\def\setupverbatiminclude{%
+  \begingroup
+    \nonfillstart
+    \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+    \begingroup\setupverbatim
+}
 %
 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
-  {%
-    \makevalueexpandable
-    \setupverbatim
-    \input #1
-    \afterenvbreak
-  }%
+     % Restore active chars for included file.
+  \endgroup
+  \begingroup
+    \let\value=\expandablevalue
+    \def\thisfile{#1}%
+    \expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile
+  \endgroup
+  \nonfillfinish
+  \endgroup
 }
 
 % @copying ... @end copying.
-% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
+% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.  Many commands won't be
+% allowed in this context, but that's ok.
 %
 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
@@ -5164,350 +4914,642 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
 % possible is very desirable.
 %
-\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
-\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
-%
-\def\insertcopying{%
-  \begingroup
-    \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
-    \scanexp\copyingtext
-  \endgroup
+\def\copying{\begingroup
+  % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end copying'.
+  % \ is the escape char in this texinfo.tex file, so it is the
+  % delimiter for the command; @ will be the escape char when we read
+  % it, but that doesn't matter.
+  \long\def\docopying##1\end copying{\gdef\copyingtext{##1}\enddocopying}%
+  %
+  % We must preserve ^^M's in the input file; see \insertcopying below.
+  \catcode`\^^M = \active
+  \docopying
+}
+
+% What we do to finish off the copying text.
+%
+\def\enddocopying{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
+
+% @insertcopying.  Here we must play games with ^^M's.  On the one hand,
+% we need them to delimit commands such as `@end quotation', so they
+% must be active.  On the other hand, we certainly don't want every
+% end-of-line to be a \par, as would happen with the normal active
+% definition of ^^M.  On the third hand, two ^^M's in a row should still
+% generate a \par.
+%
+% Our approach is to make ^^M insert a space and a penalty1 normally;
+% then it can also check if \lastpenalty=1.  If it does, then manually
+% do \par.
+%
+% This messes up the normal definitions of @c[omment], so we redefine
+% it.  Similarly for @ignore.  (These commands are used in the gcc
+% manual for man page generation.)
+%
+% Seems pretty fragile, most line-oriented commands will presumably
+% fail, but for the limited use of getting the copying text (which
+% should be quite simple) inserted, we can hope it's ok.
+%
+{\catcode`\^^M=\active %
+\gdef\insertcopying{\begingroup %
+  \parindent = 0pt  % looks wrong on title page
+  \def^^M{%
+    \ifnum \lastpenalty=1 %
+      \par %
+    \else %
+      \space \penalty 1 %
+    \fi %
+  }%
+  %
+  % Fix @c[omment] for catcode 13 ^^M's.
+  \def\c##1^^M{\ignorespaces}%
+  \let\comment = \c %
+  %
+  % Don't bother jumping through all the hoops that \doignore does, it
+  % would be very hard since the catcodes are already set.
+  \long\def\ignore##1\end ignore{\ignorespaces}%
+  %
+  \copyingtext %
+\endgroup}%
 }
 
 \message{defuns,}
 % @defun etc.
 
+% Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
+\def\setdeffont#1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
+
 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
 
-% Start the processing of @deffn:
-\def\startdefun{%
-  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
-    \medbreak
+\newcount\parencount
+
+% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
+%
+\def\activeparens{%
+  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
+  \catcode`\&=\active
+  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
+}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+
+\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
+\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+% This is used to turn on special parens
+% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
+\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
+
+% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
+% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
+\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
+  \global\advance\parencount by 1
+}
+%
+% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
+\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+%
+\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
+  % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
+  \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
+  \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
+%
+\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
+} % End of definition inside \activeparens
+%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
+%% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
+\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
+\let\ampnr = \&
+\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
+\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
+
+% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
+{
+  \catcode`& = \active
+  \global\let& = \ampnr
+}
+
+% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
+% #1 is the function name.
+% #2 is the type of definition, such as "Function".
+%
+\def\defname#1#2{%
+  % How we'll output the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
+  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
+  % just below it.
+  \ifempty{#2}%
+    \def\defnametype{}%
   \else
-    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
-    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
-    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
-    % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
-    % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
-    % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
-    % a break between a section heading and a defun.
-    % 
-    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
-    %
-    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
-    % But do insert the glue.
-    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
+    \def\defnametype{[\rm #2]}%
   \fi
   %
+  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
+  \dimen2=\leftskip
+  \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
+  %
+  % Figure out values for the paragraph shape.
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\defnametype}}%
+  \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0  % compute size for first line
+  \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent  % size for continuations
+  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
+  %
+  % Output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) but stuck inside a box of
+  % width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking.
+  \noindent
+  %
+  {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
+   % so that \rightline will obey them.
+   \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
+   \dimen3 = 0pt  % was -1.25pc
+   \rlap{\rightline{\defnametype\kern\dimen3}}%
+  }%
+  %
+  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
+  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  {\df #1}\enskip        % output function name
+  % \defunargs will be called next to output the arguments, if any.
+}
+
+% Common pieces to start any @def...
+% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
+% #2 is the \...x control sequence (which our caller defines).
+% #3 is the control sequence to process the header, such as \defunheader.
+%
+\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
+  \begingroup\inENV
+  % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
+  % which is there to keep the function description together with its
+  % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we want to allow a
+  % break after all.  Check for penalty 10002 (inserted by
+  % \defargscommonending) instead of 10000, since the sectioning
+  % commands insert a \penalty10000, and we don't want to allow a break
+  % between a section heading and a defun.
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty0 \fi
+  \medbreak
+  %
+  % Define the \E... end token that this defining construct specifies
+  % so that it will exit this group.
+  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+  %
   \parindent=0in
   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 }
 
-\def\dodefunx#1{%
-  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
-  \checkenv#1%
-  %
-  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
-  % It's not a great place, though.
-  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi
+% Common part of the \...x definitions.
+%
+\def\defxbodycommon{%
+  % As with \parsebodycommon above, allow line break if we have multiple
+  % x headers in a row.  It's not a great place, though.
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10000 \penalty1000 \fi
   %
-  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
-  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
+  \begingroup\obeylines
 }
-\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
 
-% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
+% Process body of @defun, @deffn, @defmac, etc.
 %
-\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
-  \begingroup
-    % call \deffnheader:
-    #1#2 \endheader
-    % common ending:
-    \interlinepenalty = 10000
-    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
-    \endgraf
-    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
-    \penalty 10002  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
-    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
-    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
-    \checkparencounts
-  \endgroup
+\def\defparsebody#1#2#3{%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2{\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit#3}%
+  \catcode\equalChar=\active
+  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+  \spacesplit#3%
 }
 
-\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
+% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \parsebodycommon above).
+% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
+%
+\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+  % The \empty here prevents misinterpretation of a construct such as
+  %   @deffn {whatever} {Enharmonic comma}
+  % See comments at \deftpparsebody, although in our case we don't have
+  % to remove the \empty afterwards, since it is empty.
+  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}\empty
+}
 
-% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
-% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader.
+% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
+% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).
+% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
+% #5 is the method's return type.
 %
-\def\makedefun#1{%
-  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
-  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
-    \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
-  \temp
+\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 ##2 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+  \spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}%
 }
 
-% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
+% Used for @deftypeop.  The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
+% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
+% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have
+% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
+% input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
+% the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
 %
-% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
-% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
+\def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {\def#4{##1}%
+    \defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+  \spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}%
+}
+
+% For @defop.
+\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+    \defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+  \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
+}
+
+% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
+% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
+% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
 %
-\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
-  \envdef#1{%
-    \startdefun
-    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
-  }%
-  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
-  \def#3%
+\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2{\defxbodycommon \spacesplit#3}%
+  \catcode\equalChar=\active
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+  \spacesplit#3%
 }
 
-%%% Untyped functions:
+% @defopvar.
+\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+    \defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+  \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
+}
 
-% @deffn category name args
-\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
+\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
+}
 
-% @deffn category class name args
-\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
+% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
+% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
+% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
+% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
+%
+% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
+% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
+% won't strip off the braces.
+%
+\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+  \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
+}
+
+% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
+% braces (if any).  That's what this does.
+%
+\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
 
-% \defopon {category on}class name args
-\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
+% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
+% (which might be empty) the arguments.
+%
+\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
+  #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
+}%
 
-% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
+% Split up #2 (the rest of the input line) at the first space token.
+% call #1 with two arguments:
+%  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
+%  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
+% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
+% and the second is passed as empty.
 %
-\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
-  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
-  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
-  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
+{\obeylines %
+ \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitx{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitx}%
+ \long\gdef\spacesplitx#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitx{%
+   \ifx\relax #3%
+     #1{#2}{}%
+   \else %
+     #1{#2}{#3#4}%
+   \fi}%
 }
 
-%%% Typed functions:
+% Define @defun.
 
-% @deftypefn category type name args
-\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
+% This is called to end the arguments processing for all the @def... commands.
+%
+\def\defargscommonending{%
+  \interlinepenalty = 10000
+  \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+  \endgraf
+  \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
+  \penalty 10002  % signal to \parsebodycommon.
+}
 
-% @deftypeop category class type name args
-\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
+% This expands the args and terminates the paragraph they comprise.
+%
+\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
+{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
+#1%
+{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
+\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
+  \defargscommonending
+}
 
-% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
-\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
+\boldbraxnoamp
+\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
+  \defargscommonending
+}
 
-% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
-%
-\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
-  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
-  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
+% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
+
+% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
+
+\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
+
+\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 }
 
-%%% Typed variables:
+% @defun == @deffn Function
 
-% @deftypevr category type var args
-\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
+\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
 
-% @deftypecv category class type var args
-\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
+\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
 
-% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
-\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
 
-% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
-%
-\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
-  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
-  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
+\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
+% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
+\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
+\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 }
 
-%%% Untyped variables:
+% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
 
-% @defvr category var args
-\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
+\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
 
-% @defcv category class var args
-\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
+% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$
+% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
+\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
 
-% \defcvof {category of}class var args
-\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
+% #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
+% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup
+\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
+%               at least some C++ text from working
+\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
+\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defmac == @deffn Macro
+
+\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
 
-%%% Type:
-% @deftp category name args
-\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
-  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
-  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
+\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 }
 
-% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
-\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
-\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
-\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
-\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
-\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
-\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
-\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
-\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
-\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
-\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
-\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
 
-% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
-% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
-% #2 is the return type, if any.
-% #3 is the function name.
+\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
+
+\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
 %
-% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
+\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
+\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
 %
-\def\defname#1#2#3{%
-  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
-  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
-  %
-  % How we'll format the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
-  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
-  % just below it.
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
-  %
-  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
-  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
-  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
-  \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
-  % The continuations:
-  \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
-  % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
-  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
-  %
-  % Put the type name to the right margin.
-  \noindent
-  \hbox to 0pt{%
-    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
-    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
-    \kern\leftskip
-    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
-  }%
-  %
-  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
-  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
-  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-  {%
-    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
-    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
-    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
-    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
-    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
-    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
-    % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
-    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
-    \df \tt
-    \def\temp{#2}% return value type
-    \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
-    #3% output function name
-  }%
-  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
-  %
-  \boldbrax
-  % arguments will be output next, if any.
+\def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% function index entry
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
+    \defunargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
 }
 
-% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
-% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
-% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
-% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
 %
-\def\defunargs#1{%
-  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
-  % tt for the names.
-  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
-  %
-  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
-  % want a way to get ttsl.  Let's try @var for that.
-  \let\var=\ttslanted
-  #1%
-  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
+\def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
+  \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
+                       \deftypeopcategory}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
+            {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
+  \endgroup
 }
 
-% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
+% @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
 %
-\def\activeparens{%
-  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
-  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
-  \catcode`\&=\active
+\def\deftypemethod{%
+  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
+  \endgroup
 }
 
-% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
-\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
-
-% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
-% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
-% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
-{
-  \activeparens
-  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
-  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
-  \global\let& = \&
+% @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
+%
+\def\deftypeivar{%
+  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
+\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
+            {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
+    \defvarargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
+}
 
-  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
-  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
+% @defmethod == @defop Method
+%
+\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
+\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \defunargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
 }
 
-\newcount\parencount
+% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
 
-% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
-\newif\ifampseen
-\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
-
-\def\parenfont{%
-  \ifampseen
-    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
-    % otherwise use the default font.
-    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
-  \else
-    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
-    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
-    \sf
-  \fi
-}
-\def\infirstlevel#1{%
-  \ifampseen
-    \ifnum\parencount=1
-      #1%
-    \fi
-  \fi
-}
-\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
+\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
+\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
 
-\def\opnr{%
-  \global\advance\parencount by 1
-  {\parenfont(}%
-  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
-}
-\def\clnr{%
-  {\parenfont)}%
-  \infirstlevel \sl
-  \global\advance\parencount by -1
+\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% variable index entry
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
+    \defvarargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
 }
 
-\newcount\brackcount
-\def\lbrb{%
-  \global\advance\brackcount by 1
-  {\bf[}%
-}
-\def\rbrb{%
-  {\bf]}%
-  \global\advance\brackcount by -1
+% @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
+%
+\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
+%
+\def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in var index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
+    \defvarargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
 }
 
-\def\checkparencounts{%
-  \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
-  \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
+% @defvar
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
+% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
+% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
+  \defargscommonending
 }
-\def\badparencount{%
-  \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}%
-  \global\parencount=0
+
+% @defvr Counter foo-count
+
+\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
+
+\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% @defvar == @defvr Variable
+
+\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
+
+\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
 }
-\def\badbrackcount{%
-  \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}%
-  \global\brackcount=0
+
+% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
+
+\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
+
+\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
 }
 
+% @deftypevar int foobar
+
+\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
+% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
+\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
+\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
+  \defargscommonending
+\endgroup}
+\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
+
+% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
+
+\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
+
+\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
+  \defargscommonending
+\endgroup}
+
+% Now define @deftp
+% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
+
+\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
+
+% @deftp Class window height width ...
+
+\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
+
+\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
+%
+\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
+\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
+\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
+\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
+\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
+\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
+
 
 \message{macros,}
 % @macro.
@@ -5515,41 +5557,27 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
-  \newwrite\macscribble
-  \def\scantokens#1{%
-    \toks0={#1}%
-    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
-    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
-    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
-    \input \jobname.tmp
-  }
-\fi
-
-\def\scanmacro#1{%
-  \begingroup
-    \newlinechar`\^^M
-    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
-    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
-    % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
-    % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
-    % \catcode`\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
-    % with macro expansion.				--kasal, 19aug04
-    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
-    % ... and \example
-    \spaceisspace
-    %
-    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
-    %
-    % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
-    %							--kasal, 29nov03
-    \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
-  \endgroup
-}
-
-\def\scanexp#1{%
-  \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
-  \temp
+ \newwrite\macscribble
+ \def\scanmacro#1{%
+   \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+   % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+   \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
+   % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
+   \toks0={#1\endinput}%
+   \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+   \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
+   \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+   \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+   \input \jobname.tmp
+   \endgroup
 }
+\else
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
+\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
+\fi
 
 \newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
 \newtoks\macname    % Macro name
@@ -5558,15 +5586,13 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
                     % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
 
 % Utility routines.
-% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
-%   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
-% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
-% 
+% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
 \def\cslet#1#2{%
-  \expandafter\let
-  \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
-  \csname#2\endcsname
-}
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\expandafter\let
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\csname#1\endcsname
+\csname#2\endcsname}
 
 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
@@ -5593,36 +5619,30 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
 
-\def\scanctxt{%
-  \catcode`\"=\other
-  \catcode`\+=\other
-  \catcode`\<=\other
-  \catcode`\>=\other
-  \catcode`\@=\other
+\def\macrobodyctxt{%
+  \catcode`\~=\other
   \catcode`\^=\other
   \catcode`\_=\other
   \catcode`\|=\other
-  \catcode`\~=\other
-}
-
-\def\scanargctxt{%
-  \scanctxt
-  \catcode`\\=\other
-  \catcode`\^^M=\other
-}
-
-\def\macrobodyctxt{%
-  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\+=\other
   \catcode`\{=\other
   \catcode`\}=\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
   \catcode`\^^M=\other
-  \usembodybackslash
-}
+  \usembodybackslash}
 
 \def\macroargctxt{%
-  \scanctxt
-  \catcode`\\=\other
-}
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\+=\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
+  \catcode`\\=\other}
 
 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
@@ -5663,7 +5683,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
   \fi}
 
-\parseargdef\unmacro{%
+\def\unmacro{\parsearg\dounmacro}
+\def\dounmacro#1{%
   \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
     \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
     \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
@@ -5804,41 +5825,25 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     \expandafter\parsearg
   \fi \next}
 
-% We want to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
+% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
 % expanded by \write.
 \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
   \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
 
-% For \indexnofonts, we need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the
-% arguments (if present).  Of course this is not nearly correct, but it
-% is the best we can do for now.  makeinfo does not expand macros in the
-% argument to @deffn, which ends up writing an index entry, and texindex
-% isn't prepared for an index sort entry that starts with \.
-% 
-% Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
-% to take a single TeX argument.  The case of a macro invocation that
-% goes to end-of-line is not handled.
-% 
-\def\emptyusermacros{\begingroup
-  \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\noexpand\asis}%
-  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
-
 
 % @alias.
 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
 % sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
-\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
+\def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
-\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
-  {%
-    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
-    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
-  }%
-  \next
-}
+\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
+\edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
+           \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\endgroup\next}
 
 
 \message{cross references,}
+% @xref etc.
 
 \newwrite\auxfile
 
@@ -5850,70 +5855,64 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
   node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
 
-% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
-% cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
-% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
-% @node foo , bar , ...
-% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
-%
-\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
-%
-% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
-% @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
-\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
-\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
-
+% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
+\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
+\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx #1,\finishnodeparse}
+\def\nodexxx#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
 \let\nwnode=\node
-\let\lastnode=\empty
-
-% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
-% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
-%
-\def\donoderef#1{%
-  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
-    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
-    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
+\let\lastnode=\relax
+
+% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
+\def\donoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+      {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+\def\unnumbnoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
   \fi
 }
+\def\appendixnoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+      {Yappendixletterandtype}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
 
 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
 %
 \newcount\savesfregister
-%
-\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
-\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
-\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
+\gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
+\gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
+\gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
 
 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
-% anchor), which consists of three parts:
-% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection,
-%                 or the anchor name.
-% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
-%                 empty for anchors.
-% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
-%
-% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
-% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
-% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
-%
-\def\setref#1#2{%
+% anchor), namely NAME-title (the corresponding @chapter/etc. name),
+% NAME-pg (the page number), and NAME-snt (section number and type).
+% Called from \foonoderef.
+%
+% We have to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section
+% title aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in
+% the first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
+%
+% Likewise, use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
+% and backslash work in node names.
+%
+\def\setref#1#2{{%
+  \atdummies
   \pdfmkdest{#1}%
-  \iflinks
-    {%
-      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
-      \turnoffactive
-      \otherbackslash
-      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
-	\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
-	  ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
-      }%
-      \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}%
-      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
-      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
-      \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout
-    }%
-  \fi
-}
+  %
+  \turnoffactive
+  \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+  \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+  \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
+}}
 
 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
@@ -5926,33 +5925,38 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
   \unsepspaces
   \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
-  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
-  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
-  \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
+  \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
   \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
     % No printed node name was explicitly given.
     \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
       % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
-      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+      \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
     \else
       % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
       % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
       \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
         % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
-        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+        \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
       \else
         \ifhavexrefs
           % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
-          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+          \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
         \else
           % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
-          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+          \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
         \fi%
       \fi
     \fi
   \fi
   %
-  % Make link in pdf output.
+  % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+  % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+  % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
+  % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+  % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+  % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
   \ifpdf
     \leavevmode
     \getfilename{#4}%
@@ -5962,86 +5966,64 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
          goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
      \else
        \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
-         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}%
+         goto name{#1}%
      \fi
     }%
     \linkcolor
   \fi
   %
-  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
-  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
-  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
-  {%
-    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
-    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
-    \indexnofonts
-    \turnoffactive
-    \otherbackslash
-    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
-      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
-  }%
-  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
-    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
-    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
-    \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
-      \refx{#1-snt}%
-    \else
-      \printedrefname
-    \fi
-    %
-    % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
-    % "in MANUALNAME".
-    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
-      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
-    \fi
+  \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+    \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
   \else
-    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
+    % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+    % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+    % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+    % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+    % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+    {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
+     % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+     % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+     \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+     \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+    }%
+    % output the `[mynode]' via a macro.
+    \xrefprintnodename\printednodename
     %
-    % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
-    % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
-    % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
-    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
-    % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
-    % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
-    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
-      \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
-    \else
-      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
-      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
-      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
-      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
-      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
-      {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
-       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
-       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
-       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
-       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
-      }%
-      % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
-      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
-      %
-      % But we always want a comma and a space:
-      ,\space
-      %
-      % output the `page 3'.
-      \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
-    \fi
+    % But we always want a comma and a space:
+    ,\space
+    %
+    % output the `page 3'.
+    \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
   \fi
   \endlink
 \endgroup}
 
 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
 % output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
-% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
+% since not square brackets don't work in some documents.  Particularly
 % one that Bob is working on :).
 %
 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
 
-% Things referred to by \setref.
+% \dosetq is called from \setref to do the actual \write (\iflinks).
+%
+\def\dosetq#1#2{%
+  {\let\folio=0%
+   \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
+   \iflinks \next \fi
+  }%
+}
+
+% \internalsetq{foo}{page} expands into
+%   CHARACTERS @xrdef{foo}{...expansion of \page...}
+\def\internalsetq#1#2{@xrdef{#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
+
+% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq.
 %
+\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
+\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
 \def\Ynothing{}
-\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
-\def\Ynumbered{%
+\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
   \ifnum\secno=0
     \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
   \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
@@ -6052,7 +6034,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
   \fi\fi\fi
 }
-\def\Yappendix{%
+
+\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
   \ifnum\secno=0
      \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
   \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
@@ -6065,6 +6048,15 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \fi\fi\fi
 }
 
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
+\else
+  \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
 %
@@ -6073,7 +6065,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     \indexnofonts
     \otherbackslash
     \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
-      \csname XR#1\endcsname
+      \csname X#1\endcsname
   }%
   \ifx\thisrefX\relax
     % If not defined, say something at least.
@@ -6095,44 +6087,11 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   #2% Output the suffix in any case.
 }
 
-% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
-% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
-% collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
 %
-\def\xrdef#1#2{%
-  \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value.
-  %
-  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
-  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname
-    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
-    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
-      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
-    %
-    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
-    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
-      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
-    \else
-      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
-      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
-    \fi
-    %
-    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
-    % for later use in \listoffloats.
-    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}%
-  \fi
-}
+\def\xrdef#1{\expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname}
 
 % Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
-%
-\def\tryauxfile{%
-  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
-  \ifeof 1 \else
-    \readauxfile
-    \global\havexrefstrue
-  \fi
-  \closein 1
-}
-
 \def\readauxfile{\begingroup
   \catcode`\^^@=\other
   \catcode`\^^A=\other
@@ -6191,16 +6150,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \catcode`\%=\other
   \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
   %
-  % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
-  % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
-  % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
-  % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
-  % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
-  % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
-  % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
-  \catcode`\\=\other
-  %
-  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
+  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
   {%
     \count 1=128
     \def\loop{%
@@ -6210,17 +6160,31 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     }%
   }%
   %
-  % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
+  % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
+  % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
+  % For example, @xrdef{$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
+  % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
+  % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  %
+  % @ is our escape character in .aux files.
   \catcode`\{=1
   \catcode`\}=2
   \catcode`\@=0
   %
-  \input \jobname.aux
+  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+  \ifeof 1 \else
+    \closein 1
+    \input \jobname.aux
+    \global\havexrefstrue
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+  \fi
+  % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+  \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
 \endgroup}
 
 
-\message{insertions,}
-% including footnotes.
+% Footnotes.
 
 \newcount \footnoteno
 
@@ -6234,12 +6198,13 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
 \let\footnotestyle=\comment
 
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+
 {\catcode `\@=11
 %
 % Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
 \gdef\footnote{%
   \let\indent=\ptexindent
-  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
   \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
   \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
   %
@@ -6257,12 +6222,17 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
 % footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
 %
-% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
-% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
 % the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
 %
+% The start of the footnote looks usually like this:
+\gdef\startfootins{\insert\footins\bgroup}
+%
+% ... but this macro is redefined inside @multitable.
+%
 \gdef\dofootnote{%
-  \insert\footins\bgroup
+  \startfootins
   % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
   % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
   % So reset some parameters.
@@ -6298,66 +6268,40 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 }
 }%end \catcode `\@=11
 
-% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
-% the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
-% would be lost.
-% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
-% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
-% And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
-
-% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
-% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
-% out prematurely.
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
+% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
 %
-\def\startsavinginserts{%
-  \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
-    \let\insert\saveinsert
-  \else
-    \let\checkinserts\relax
-  \fi
+\def\|{%
+  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+  \leavevmode
+  %
+  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+  \vadjust{%
+    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+    \vskip-\baselineskip
+    %
+    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
+    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+    \llap{%
+      %
+      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+      %
+      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+      \hskip 12pt
+    }%
+  }%
 }
 
-% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
-% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
 %
-\def\saveinsert#1{%
-  \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
-  \afterassignment\next
-  % swallow the left brace
-  \let\temp =
-}
-\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
-\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
-
-\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
-
-\def\placesaveins#1{%
-  \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
-    {\box#1}%
-}
-
-% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
-{
-  \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
-  \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
-}
-
-% initialization:
-\def\newsaveins #1{%
-  \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
-  \next
-}
-\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
-  \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
-  \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
-    \checksaveins #1}%
-}
-
-% initialize:
-\let\checkinserts\empty
-\newsaveins\footins
-\newsaveins\margin
-
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
 
 % @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
@@ -6367,12 +6311,12 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % undone and the next image would fail.
 \openin 1 = epsf.tex
 \ifeof 1 \else
+  \closein 1
   % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
   % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
   \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
   \input epsf.tex
 \fi
-\closein 1
 %
 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
@@ -6428,269 +6372,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \endgroup}
 
 
-% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
-% etc.  We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
-% float "here".  But it seemed the best name for the future.
-%
-\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
-
-% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
-\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
-
-% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
-% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
-% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
-%
-% #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
-% be referable.
-%
-% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
-% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
-%
-% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
-% chapter-level command.
-\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
-%
-\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
-  \let\thiscaption=\empty
-  \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
-  %
-  % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
-  %
-  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
-  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
-  %
-  \startsavinginserts
-  %
-  % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
-  \par
-  %
-  \vtop\bgroup
-    \def\floattype{#1}%
-    \def\floatlabel{#2}%
-    \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
-    %
-    \ifx\floattype\empty
-      \let\safefloattype=\empty
-    \else
-      {%
-        % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
-        % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
-        \indexnofonts
-        \turnoffactive
-        \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
-      }%
-    \fi
-    %
-    % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
-    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
-      % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
-      % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
-      %
-      \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
-      \global\advance\floatno by 1
-      %
-      {%
-        % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the
-        % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
-        % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
-        % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
-        % lists of floats.
-        %
-        \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
-        \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
-      }%
-    \fi
-    %
-    % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
-    \vskip\parskip
-    %
-    % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
-    \restorefirstparagraphindent
-}
-
-% we have these possibilities:
-% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
-% @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
-% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
-% @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
-% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
-% @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
-% @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
-% @float & no caption:
-%
-\def\Efloat{%
-    \let\floatident = \empty
-    %
-    % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
-    \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
-    %
-    % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
-    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
-      \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
-        \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
-      \fi
-      % the number.
-      \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
-    \fi
-    %
-    % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
-    % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
-    \let\captionline = \floatident
-    %
-    \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
-      \ifx\floatident\empty \else
-	\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
-      \fi
-      %
-      % caption text.
-      \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
-    \fi
-    %
-    % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
-    % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
-    \ifx\captionline\empty \else
-      \vskip.5\parskip
-      \captionline
-      %
-      % Space below caption.
-      \vskip\parskip
-    \fi
-    %
-    % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
-    % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
-    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
-      % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
-      % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
-      % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
-      {%
-        \atdummies \turnoffactive \otherbackslash
-        % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
-        % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
-        % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
-	\scanexp{%
-	  \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
-	    \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
-	      \thiscaption
-	    \else
-	      \thisshortcaption
-	    \fi
-	  }%
-	}%
-        \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
-	  \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
-      }%
-    \fi
-  \egroup  % end of \vtop
-  %
-  % place the captured inserts
-  %
-  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
-  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
-  %
-  \checkinserts
-}
-
-% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
-%
-\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
-  \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
-}
-
-% @caption, @shortcaption
-%
-\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
-\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
-\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
-\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
-
-% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
-% going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
-\def\getfloatno#1{%
-  \ifx#1\relax
-      % Haven't seen this figure type before.
-      \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
-      %
-      % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
-      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
-        \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
-  \fi
-  \let\floatno#1%
-}
-
-% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
-% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
-% first read the @float command.
-%
-\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
-
-% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
-% distinguish floats from other xref types.
-\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
-
-% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
-% which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
-% \thissection value which we \setref above.
-%
-\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
-%
-% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
-% (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
-%
-\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \def\iffloattype{#2}%
-  \ifx\temp\floatmagic
-}
-
-% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
-%
-\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
-  \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
-  {%
-    % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
-    % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
-    \indexnofonts
-    \turnoffactive
-    \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
-  }%
-  %
-  % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
-    \ifhavexrefs
-      % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
-      \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \begingroup
-      \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
-      \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
-      \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
-    \endgroup
-  \fi
-}
-
-% This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
-% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
-% aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
-% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
-%
-% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
-% they won't appear in the aux file).
-%
-\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
-\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
-  % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
-  % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
-  % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
-  % in pdf output.
-  \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
-  %
-  % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
-  \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
-  \writeentry
-}}
-
 \message{localization,}
 % and i18n.
 
@@ -6699,17 +6380,19 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
 % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
 %
-\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
+\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
+\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
   \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
-    % Read the file if it exists.
-    \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
-    \ifeof 1
-      \errhelp = \nolanghelp
-      \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
-    \else
-      \input txi-#1.tex
-    \fi
-    \closein 1
+  % Read the file if it exists.
+  \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+  \ifeof1
+    \errhelp = \nolanghelp
+    \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
+    \let\temp = \relax
+  \else
+    \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
+  \fi
+  \temp
   \endgroup
 }
 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
@@ -6892,7 +6575,8 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
 %
-\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
+\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
   \globaldefs = 1
@@ -6939,8 +6623,8 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 \def\normalplus{+}
 \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
 
-% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
-% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
+% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
 % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
 %
 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
@@ -6988,6 +6672,13 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 \catcode`\$=\active
 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
 
+% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
+{\catcode`\==\active
+\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
+
+\catcode`+=\active
+\catcode`\_=\active
+
 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
@@ -6996,16 +6687,15 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 
 \catcode`\@=0
 
-% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
+% \rawbackslashxx outputs one backslash character in current font,
 % as in \char`\\.
-\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
-\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
+\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
 
-% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
+% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \rawbackslashxx.
 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
 % catcode other.
 {\catcode`\\=\active
- @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
+ @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx}
  @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
 }
 
@@ -7013,7 +6703,7 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
 
 % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
-\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\backslashcurfont}}
+\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
 
 \catcode`\\=\active
 
@@ -7030,7 +6720,6 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
   @let>=@normalgreater
   @let+=@normalplus
   @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
-  @unsepspaces
 }
 
 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
@@ -7070,6 +6759,10 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 @catcode`@# = @other
 @catcode`@% = @other
 
+@c Set initial fonts.
+@textfonts
+@rm
+
 
 @c Local variables:
 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
@@ -7078,9 +6771,3 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
 @c time-stamp-end: "}"
 @c End:
-
-@c vim:sw=2:
-
-@ignore
-   arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
-@end ignore